Update translations

68 files changed, 2008 insertions, 1954 deletions

diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
index 49b6e871..54732a4f 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
@@ -9,19 +9,20 @@ Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about
   <section>
     <title>Wprowadzenie</title>
     <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose
-which image match your needs.</para>
-    <para>There is two families of media:</para>
+which image best suits your needs.</para>
+    <para>There are two families of media:</para>
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>Classical installer: After booting the media, it will follow a process
-allowing to choose what to install and how to configure your target
-system. This give you the maximal flexibility for a customized installation,
-in particular to choose which Desktop Environment you will install.</para>
+        <para>Classical installer: Booting with this media provides you with the maximum
+flexibility when choosing what to install, and for configuring your
+system. In particular, you have a choice of which Desktop environment to
+install</para>
       </listitem>
       <listitem>
-        <para>LIVE media: you can boot the media in a real Mageia system without
-installing it, to see what you will get after installation.  The
-installation process is simpler, but you get lesser choices.</para>
+        <para>LIVE media: This option allows you to try out Mageia without having to
+actually install it, or make any changes to your computer.  If the
+installation is decided, the process is simpler, but you get fewer choices
+than offered by the Classical installer</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
     <para>Details are given in the next sections.</para>
@@ -31,9 +32,9 @@ installation process is simpler, but you get lesser choices.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Definicja</title>
       <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to
-install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support the ISO
-file is copied to.</para>
-      <para>You can find them <link
+install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support (DVD, USB
+stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para>
+      <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link
 ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
@@ -42,13 +43,14 @@ ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
         <title>Powszechne możliwości</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx.</para>
+            <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called drakx.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases.</para>
+            <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously
+installed version of Mageia.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Różne media dla 32 i 64 bitowych architektur.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test,
@@ -69,18 +71,18 @@ Hardware Detection Tool.</para>
         <title>Powszechne możliwości</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and
-optionally install Mageia on to your HDD.</para>
+            <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install
+it. Can also be used to install Mageia if you wish.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce).</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Różne media dla 32 i 64 bitowych architektur.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean
-installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous
+installations, they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia
 releases.</emphasis></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
@@ -95,7 +97,7 @@ releases.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Plasma desktop environment only.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Wszystkie języki są obecne.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>64 bit architecture only.</para>
@@ -109,7 +111,7 @@ releases.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Tylko środowisko graficzne GNOME.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Wszystkie języki są obecne.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>64 bit architecture only</para>
@@ -123,7 +125,7 @@ releases.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Xfce desktop environment only.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Wszystkie języki są obecne.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
@@ -132,27 +134,27 @@ releases.</emphasis></para>
       </section>
     </section>
     <section>
-      <title>Boot-only urządzenia CD</title>
+      <title>Net install media</title>
       <section>
         <title>Powszechne możliwości</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to
+            <para>These are minimal ISO's containing no more than that which is needed to
 start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages
 that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be
 on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the
 Internet.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when
-bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, a PC without a DVD drive or a
-PC that can't boot from a USB stick.</para>
+            <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if
+bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a
+DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Różne media dla 32 i 64 bitowych architektur.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Tylko język angielski.</para>
+            <para>First steps are English language only.</para>
           </listitem>
         </itemizedlist>
       </section>
@@ -181,50 +183,58 @@ it.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Pobieranie</title>
       <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or
-BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the
-mirror in use and an opportunity to change if the bandwidth is to low. If
-http is chosen, you may also see something like</para>
+BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as
+the mirror in use and an option to switch if the bandwidth is too low. If
+http is chosen, you will also see something regarding checksums.</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of
-them. Keep one of them <link linkend="integrity">for further
-usage</link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:</para>
+      <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Choose one or the
+other, and copy the checksum <link linkend="integrity">for later
+use</link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para>Sprawdź przycisk Save File.</para>
+      <para>Select the Save File option, then, click OK.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
       <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title>
-      <para>Both checksums are hexadecimal numbers calculated by an algorithm from the
-file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this
-number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your
-downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a
-failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download or attempt a
-repair using BitTorrent.</para>
-      <para>Otwórz konsolę, root nie wymagany i:</para>
-      <para>- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum
+      <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an
+algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of
+your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the
+checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not
+match, and if it is the case, then you should retry the download or attempt
+a repair using BitTorrent.</para>
+      <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need
+to be root), and:</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use md5sum, type: <userinput>md5sum
 path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
-      <para>- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum
-path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
-      <para>and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a
-while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use sha1sum, type: <userinput>sha1sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      <para> Example:</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Md5sum.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para/>
+      <para>and compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the checksum
+provided by Mageia.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
   <section>
     <title>Wypal lub zrzuć obraz ISO</title>
-    <para>The checked ISO can now be burned to a CD or DVD or dumped to a USB
-stick. These operations are not a simple copy and aim to make a bootable
-medium.</para>
+    <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or dumped to a USB
+stick. This is not a standard copy operation as a bootable medium will
+actually be created.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Wypalenie obrazu ISO na CD/DVD</title>
-      <para>Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly
-to <emphasis role="bold">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is not
-correct. There is more information in <link
+      <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an <emphasis
+role="bold">image</emphasis> is used, burn <emphasis
+role="bold">data</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">files</emphasis> is not
+correct. See <link
 ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia
-wiki</link>.</para>
+wiki</link> for more information.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
       <title>Zrzuć obraz ISO na pamięci USB</title>
@@ -232,8 +242,8 @@ wiki</link>.</para>
 and then use it to boot and install the system.</para>
       <warning>
         <para>"Dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on
-the device; any other data will be lost and the partition capacity will be
-reduced to the image size.</para>
+the device; any existing data will be lost and the partition capacity will
+be reduced to the image size.</para>
       </warning>
       <para>To recover the original capacity, you must redo partitioning and re-format
 the USB stick.</para>
@@ -245,25 +255,30 @@ ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks"
       <section>
         <title>Używanie graficznych narzędzi w Windows</title>
         <para>Powinieneś spróbować:</para>
-        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the
 "ISO image" option;</para>
-        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32
-Disk Imager</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk
+Imager</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
       </section>
       <section>
         <title>Użycie linii poleceń w systemie GNU/Linux</title>
         <warning>
-          <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk to overwrite a
-disc partition if you get the device-ID wrong.</para>
+          <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting
+potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para>
         </warning>
-        <para>Możesz także użyć narzędzia dd w konsoli:</para>
         <orderedlist>
           <listitem>
             <para>Otwórz konsolę</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the
-final '-' )</para>
+            <para>Become a root (Administrator) user with the command <userinput>su
+-</userinput> (don't forget the final '-' )</para>
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
           </listitem>
@@ -275,10 +290,16 @@ application or file manager that could access or read it)</para>
             <para>Wpisz polecenie <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para>
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-            <para>Alternatively, you can get the device name with the command
-<code>dmesg</code>: at end, you see the device name starting with
-<emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> in this case:</para>
-            <screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example
+<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is an 8GB USB stick.</para>
+            <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command
+<code>dmesg</code>: towards the end of this example, you can see the device
+name starting with <emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and in this case,
+<emphasis>sdd</emphasis> is the actual device. You can also see that its
+size is 2GB:</para>
+            <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
 [72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000
 [72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
 [72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device
@@ -295,27 +316,30 @@ application or file manager that could access or read it)</para>
 [72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found
 [72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through
 [72595.967251]  <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1
-[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen>
-          </listitem>
-          <listitem>
-            <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example
-<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is a 8GB USB stick.</para>
+[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Wpisz polecenie: # <userinput>dd if=ścieżka/do/obrazu/ISO.iso of=/dev/sdX
-bs=1M</userinput></para>
-            <para>Gdzie X=twoje urządzenie nazwane np. /dev/sdc</para>
-            <para>Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso
-of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput></para>
+            <para>Enter the command: <emphasis role="bold"># <userinput>dd
+if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para>
+            <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdd</para>
+            <para>Example:<emphasis role="bold"> # <userinput>dd
+if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/sdd
+bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para>
+            <tip>
+              <para>It might helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands for
+<emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile
+and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands for <emphasis
+role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para>
+            </tip>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Wpisz polecenie: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Odepnij swoją pamięć USB, skończone</para>
+            <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para>
           </listitem>
         </orderedlist>
       </section>
     </section>
   </section>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/acceptLicense.xml
index d15d4448..d15b809f 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/acceptLicense.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -35,11 +35,11 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"
-revision="4" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-license.png"/>
-</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im2"
-revision="5" align="center" condition="live" format="PNG"
-fileref="live-license.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center"
+revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5"
+align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <section xml:id="license">
     <info>
@@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ uważnie warunki umowy licencyjnej.</para>
 <application>Mageia</application> i muszą być zaakceptowane przed
 kontynuacją instalacji.</para>
 
-    <para>Aby zaakceptować po prostu wybierz <guilabel>Akceptuj</guilabel> i kliknij
-<guibutton>Dalej</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>To proceed, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
 
     <para>Jeśli zdecydujesz że nie zgadzasz się na warunki licencji, dziękujemy za
 zainteresowanie. Kliknięcie <guibutton>Zakończ</guibutton> spowoduje ponowne
@@ -76,7 +76,8 @@ Release Notes</para>
 
     
 
-    <para>Aby zobaczyć co nowego w tym wydaniu <application>Mageia</application>,
-Kliknij <guibutton>Informacje na temat wydania</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>Important information about this release of
+<application>Mageia</application> can be viewed by clicking on the
+<guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button.</para>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/addUser.xml
index 4d8064a1..a2edc324 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/addUser.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/addUser.xml
@@ -1,101 +1,112 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="addUser">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="addUser">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">Zarządzanie użytkownikami</title>
   </info>
+
   
+
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)-->
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
 fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" align="center" revision="1"
 xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata
 format="PNG" fileref="live-user1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <section xml:id="root-password">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Ustawienie hasła administratora (root):</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Wskazane jest, aby ustawić hasło administratora (root) w każdej instalacji
-<application>Magei</application>.  Gdy wpisujesz hasło zmienia się kolor
-tarczy - z czerwonego poprzez żółty do zielonego - w zależności od siły
-hasła. Zielona tarcza sygnalizuje że używasz silnego hasła. Aby upewnić się,
-że nie popełniłeś literówki w haśle, musisz wpisać je po raz drugi w polu
-poniżej.</para>
+
+    <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to
+set a <emphasis role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (administrator) password,
+usually called the <emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type
+a password into the top box a shield will change from red to yellow to green
+depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are
+using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box
+underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped.</para>
+
     <note xml:id="givePassword">
-      <para>We wszystkich hasłach rozróżniane są duże i małe litery, najlepiej użyć
-hasła zawierającego litery (duże i małe), numery oraz inne znaki.</para>
+      <para>All passwords are case sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters
+(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
+
   <section xml:id="enterUser">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Dodaj użytkownika</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Tutaj dodajemy użytkownika. Użytkownik ma mniejsze uprawnienia od
-administratora (root), ale wystarczające, aby przeglądać Internet, używać
-pakietów biurowych lub grać w gry czy wykonywać wszystkie inne czynności,
-które wykonuje na swoim komputerze przeciętny użytkownik.</para>
+
+    <para>Add a user here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the <emphasis
+role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (root), but enough to use the internet,
+office applications or play games and anything else the average user might
+use their computer for.</para>
+
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
         <para><guibutton>Ikona</guibutton>: użycie tego przycisku zmieni ikonę
 użytkownika.</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
         <para><guilabel>Imię i nazwisko</guilabel>: Wpisz swoje imię i nazwisko do tego
 pola tekstowego</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Nazwa użytkownika</guilabel>: Tutaj wpisz nazwę użytkownika -
-będzie ona używana podczas logowania. Możesz też pozwolić, aby instalator
-wygenerował nazwę na podstawie imienia i nazwiska. <emphasis>Wielkość liter
-ma znaczenie.</emphasis></para>
+        <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Enter the user login name or let DrakX use
+a version of the user's real name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is
+case sensitive.</emphasis></para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Hasło</guilabel>: W tym polu wpisz hasło użytkownika. Pojawi się w
-nim ikonka tarczy, która oznacza siłę hasła (Zobacz również <xref
-linkend="givePassword"/>)</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Type in the user password. There is a shield
+at the end of the text box that indicates the strength of the password. (See
+also <xref linkend="givePassword"/>)</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Hasło (powtórnie)</guilabel>: Wpisz powtórnie hasło użytkownika w
-tym polu, instalator sprawdzi czy hasła się zgadzają.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password DrakX will
+check that you have not mistyped the password.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
+
     <note>
-      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a both read and write
-protected home directory (umask=0027).</para>
-      <para>You can add all extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration -
+      <para>Any users you added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected (umask=0027).</para>
+
+      <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration -
 Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User
 management</emphasis>.</para>
+
       <para>Ustawienia dostępu mogą być również zmienione po instalacji.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
+
   <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced" condition="classical">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Zaawansowane Zarządzanie Użytkownikami</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Po kliknięciu na przycisk <guibutton>Zaawansowane</guibutton> będziesz miał
-możliwość edycji ustawień dla użytkownika którego dodajesz.</para>
-    <para condition="classical">Dodatkowo, możesz włączyć lub wyłączyć konto gościa</para>
-    <warning condition="classical">
-      <para>Wszystkie dane, które zapisze w swoim katalogu domowym gość zostaną
-wykasowane po jego wylogowaniu. Gość musi zapisywać ważne pliki na USB.</para>
-    </warning>
+
+    <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> option allows you to edit further
+settings for the user you are adding.</para>
+
     <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem condition="classical">
-        <para><guilabel>Aktywuj konto gościa</guilabel>: Tutaj aktywujesz lub deaktywujesz
-konto gościa. Konto gościa pozwala na zalogowanie się i używanie komputera
-przez gości, ale posiada mniejsze uprawnienia niż zwykły użytkownik.</para>
-      </listitem>
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Powłoka</guilabel>: Ta lista pozwala na zmianę powłoki używanej
-przez użytkownika, którego dodajesz, do wyboru Bash, Dash oraz Sh</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop-down list allows you to change the
+shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are
+<emphasis role="bold">Bash</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Dash</emphasis>
+and <emphasis role="bold">Sh</emphasis></para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Tutaj możesz ustawić ID dla użytkownika
-którego dodałeś w poprzednim ekranie. Jest to numer. Zostaw puste, chyba że
-wiesz, co robisz.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the <emphasis
+role="bold">user ID</emphasis> for any user you added in the previous
+screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, then leave it blank.</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: Pozwala to ustawić ID grupy. Także numer,
-zwykle taki sam jak dla użytkownika. Zostaw puste, chyba że wiesz, co
-robisz.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the <emphasis
+role="bold">group ID</emphasis>. Again, if unsure, leave it blank.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
   </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/add_supplemental_media.xml
index 2887a8ba..ecf6fa06 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/add_supplemental_media.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -1,55 +1,52 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Wybór nośników (konfiguracja dodatkowych nośników instalacyjnych)</title>
-    </info>
+  </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
-fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
-xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Ten ekran pokazuje listę znalezionych nośników. Możesz dodać inne nośniki
-instalacyjne, jak dysk cd/dvd lub zdalny serwer sieciowy. Wybór źródeł
-(nośników) decyduje o tym jakie pakiety będą mogły zostać wybrane podczas
-następnych kroków.</para>
+  <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognized repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source.
+The source selection determines which packages will be available during the
+next steps.</para>
 
   <para>Dla nośników sieciowych, wymagane są dwa kroki:</para>
 
   <orderedlist>
     <listitem>
       <para>Wybór i aktywacja połączenia sieciowego, jeśli jeszcze nie zostało
-ustanowione. </para>
+ustanowione.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Wybór mirrora lub podanie adresu URL. Wybierając mirror masz dostęp do
-wszystkich repozytoriów udostępnianych przez Mageię, jak Nonfree, Tainted
-oraz Updates. Za pomocą URL możesz określić jakiekolwiek repozytorium lub
-swój własny mirror np. NFS.</para>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis
+role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis
+role="bold">Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific
+repository or your own NFS installation.</para>
     </listitem>
   </orderedlist>
 
-    <note>
-      <para>Jeśli aktualizujesz 64-bitową instalację która może zawierać 32-bitowe
-paczki, zaleca się w tym kroku dodać serwer lustrzany online poprzez
-zaznaczenie jednego z internetowych protokołów. 64-bitowa płyta DVD zawiera
-jedynie 64-bitowe paczki i te bez przypisanej architektury, nie będzie mogła
-zaktualizować 32-bitowych paczek. Jakkolwiek, po dodaniu serwera online,
-instalator powinien znaleźć w nim 32-bitowe paczki.</para>
-     </note>
-
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit
+packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by
+ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only contains
+64-bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32-bit
+packages. However, after adding an online mirror, the installer will find
+the needed 32-bit packages there.</para>
+  </note>
 </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
index 96481152..8c4b1816 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -1,27 +1,27 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Wybierz punkty montowania</title>
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
@@ -33,55 +33,58 @@
        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
 <!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
 <!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
-<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
-xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
-condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
-xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center"
+xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>Tutaj zobaczysz partycje Linux, które zostały znalezione na Twoim
 komputerze. Jeśli nie zgadzasz się z sugestiami <application>instalatora
 DrakX</application>, możesz zmienić punkty montowania.</para>
 
   <note>
-    <para>Jeśli cokolwiek zmienisz, upewnij się że wciąż masz partycję
-<literal>/</literal> (root).</para>
+    <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <emphasis
+role="bold"><literal>/</literal></emphasis> (root) partition.</para>
   </note>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para>Każda partycja jest ukazana jako: "Urządzenie" ("Pojemność", "Punkt
-montowania", "Typ").</para>
+      <para>Every partition is shown to the left as: <emphasis role="bold">Device
+(capacity, mount point, type).</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>"Urządzenie" jest przedstawione jako: "dysk twardy", ["litera dysku"],
-"numer partycji" (dla przykładu: "sda5").</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Device</emphasis>, is made up of: <emphasis
+role="bold">hard drive</emphasis>, [<emphasis role="bold">hard drive
+name</emphasis> (letter)], <emphasis role="bold">partition number</emphasis>
+(for example, <emphasis role="bold">sda5</emphasis>).</para>
     </listitem>
 
-    
     <listitem>
-      <para>Jeśli masz wiele partycji, możesz wybrać wiele różnych punktów montowania z
-listy rozwijalnej, takich jak <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal>
-oraz <literal>/var</literal>.
-Możesz także tworzyć własne punkty montowania, na przykład
-<literal>/video</literal> dla partycji na której chcesz przechowywać swoje
-filmy.</para>
+      <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different mount
+points from the drop down menu, such as <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>,
+<emphasis role="bold"><literal>/home</literal></emphasis> and <emphasis
+role="bold">/var</emphasis>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <emphasis role="bold"><literal>/video</literal></emphasis> for a
+partition where you want to store your films, or <emphasis
+role="bold">/Data</emphasis> (or some other name) for your data.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Możesz pozostawić punkt montowania pusty dla partycji, do których nie chcesz
-mieć dostępu.</para>
+      <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the
+mount point field blank.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
   <warning>
-    <para>Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose,
-and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen
-that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para>
+    <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis
+role="bold">Previous</emphasis> to go back and then tick <guilabel>Custom
+disk partitioning</guilabel>, where, you can click on a partition to see its
+type and size.</para>
   </warning>
 
   <para>Jeśli jesteś pewny że punkty montowania są dobrze ustawione, kliknij
 <guibutton>Dalej</guibutton>, by zdecydować które partycje sformatować.</para>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/chooseDesktop.xml
index 8ecd9749..651d578f 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/chooseDesktop.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -6,22 +6,23 @@
 
   
 
-  <para>W zależności  od wyboru którego tutaj dokonasz, możesz zobaczyć dalsze
-ekrany, aby dokonać dalszych ustawień instalacji.</para>
+  <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to
+fine-tune your choice.</para>
 
-  <para>Po wyborze pulpitu, podczas instalacji pakietów zobaczysz pokaz
-slajdów. Może on być wyłączony poprzez kliknięcie przycisku
-<guilabel>Szczegóły</guilabel></para>
+  <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide-show during package
+installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the
+<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Wybierz środowisko graficzne <application>KDE</application> lub
-<application>Gnome</application>.  Oba z nich zawierają pełny zestaw
-użytecznych programów i narzędzi. Wybierz <guilabel>Własne</guilabel> jeśli
-nie chcesz żadnego z nich lub chcesz wybrać oba, lub jeśli chcesz wybrać
-inne środowisko. <application>LXDE</application> jest zdecydowanie lżejsze,
-lecz oferuje także mniejszą funkcjonalność oraz mniej domyślnie
-zainstalowanych programów.</para>
+  <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application>
+<emphasis role="bold">Plasma</emphasis> or <application>GNOME</application>
+desktop environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and
+tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you wish to use neither (or even
+use both), or if you want to modify the default software choices for these
+desktop environments. The <application>LXDE</application> desktop, for
+instance, is lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and
+fewer packages installed by default.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackageGroups.xml
index 05a7e5ec..027ec384 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackageGroups.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -10,29 +10,30 @@
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Aby ułatwić ci wybór, pakiety zostały podzielone na grupy. Nazwy grup nie
-wymagają objaśnień, jednak więcej informacji o każdej z nich możesz uzyskać
-najeżdżając na nie myszą.</para>
+  <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para>Stacja robocza</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Serwer</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Środowisko graficzne</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphical Environment</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Samodzielny wybór pakietów: możesz zaznaczyć tą opcję jeśli chcesz
-samodzielnie dodawać lub usuwać pakiety.</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use
+this option to manually add or remove packages</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
-  <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a
+  <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a
 minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM).</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackagesTree.xml
index e59fae40..2f985fba 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackagesTree.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -1,23 +1,21 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Samodzielny wybór pakietów</title>
+  </info>
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Samodzielny wybór pakietów</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
-    
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
-format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-    <para>Tutaj możesz dodawać lub usuwać jakie tylko chcesz pakiety, aby dostosować
-instalację do swoich potrzeb.</para>
+  <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your
+installation.</para>
 
-    <para>Po dokonaniu wyboru, możesz kliknąć na <guibutton>ikonę
+  <para>Po dokonaniu wyboru, możesz kliknąć na <guibutton>ikonę
 dyskietki</guibutton> na dole okna, aby zachować swój wybór pakietów
 (zapisywanie na dysku USB także działa). Możesz użyć tego pliku do
 instalacji tych samych pakietów na innym komputerze, naciskając tą samą
 ikonę i wybierając wczytanie pliku.</para>
-  </section>
-
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureServices.xml
index d583567a..bbf660aa 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureServices.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureServices.xml
@@ -1,40 +1,26 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="configureServices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Konfiguracja usług</title>
+  </info>
 
+  
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Konfiguracja usług</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
-    
-   
-
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Tutaj możesz ustawić które usługi powinny (nie) włączać się kiedy
-uruchamiasz system.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">Są tutaj cztery grupy, kliknij na trójkąt przed grupą aby rozszerzyć ją i
-zobaczyć wszystkie usługi wchodzące w jej skład.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa3" revision="1">The settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">Ustawienia, które wybierze DrakX zwykle są dobre.</para>
-
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">Jeżeli zaznaczysz usługę, niektóre informacje o niej pokażą w okienku
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">Jeżeli zaznaczysz usługę, niektóre informacje o niej pokażą w okienku
 poniżej.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Zmień to tylko i wyłącznie wtedy, kiedy wiesz co robisz.</para>
-  </section>
-
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Zmień to tylko i wyłącznie wtedy, kiedy wiesz co robisz.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
index c7d29112..cbfc0277 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Konfiguruj strefę czasową</title>
   </info>
@@ -10,17 +10,17 @@
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
-xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
-</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-timeZone.png"
-condition="live" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="live-timeZone.png"
+condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Wybierz swoją strefę czasową poprzez wybranie swojego kraju lub miasta w
-pobliżu w tej samej strefie czasowej.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your time-zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the
+same time-zone.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">W następnym kroku możesz wybrać ustawienie zegara sprzętowego, na czas
-lokalny lub UTC.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time
+or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
 
   <note>
     <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">Jeżeli posiadasz więcej niż jeden system operacyjny na swoim komputerze
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_card_list.xml
index 356b67c7..f1fa18b4 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_card_list.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_card_list" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   
 
   
@@ -6,7 +6,9 @@
   
 
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
 <!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
@@ -17,9 +19,9 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
-xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
-format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>DrakX posiada bardzo szeroką bazę danych kart wideo, oraz zwykle
 zidentyfikuje twoje urządzenie wideo poprawnie.</para>
@@ -39,23 +41,21 @@ kartę posiadasz, możesz wybrać jedną za pomocą: <itemizedlist>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist></para>
 
-  <para>Jeżeli nie potrafisz znaleźć swojej karty graficznej na liście (ponieważ
-jeszcze nie ma jej w bazie danych lub jest starszą kartą) możesz znaleźć
-działający sterownik w katalogu Xorg.</para>
-
-  <para>Listing Xorg dostarcza więcej jak 40 zamkniętych oraz otwartych sterowników
-do kart graficznych. Jeżeli wciąż nie potrafisz znaleźć nazwanego sterownika
-dla twojej karty istnieje jeszcze opcja użycia sterownika vesa, który
-dostarcza podstawowe funkcje.</para>
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+<emphasis role="bold">Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40
+generic and open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a
+specific driver for your card there is the option of using the <emphasis
+role="bold">vesa</emphasis> driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
 
-  <para>Bądź ostrożny, ponieważ jeśli wybierzesz niekompatybilny sterownik możesz
-posiadać dostęp tylko do interfejsu tekstowego.</para>
+  <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the <emphasis role="bold">Command-line</emphasis> Interface.</para>
 
-  <para>Niektórzy producenci kart graficznych udostępniają własnościowe sterowniki
-dla Linuksa, które mogą być umieszczone jedynie w repozytorium Nonfree, w
-niektórych przypadkach są one dostępne jedynie na stronie producenta.</para>
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis>
+repository and in some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites.</para>
 
-  <para>Aby je zainstalować musi być włączone repozytorium Nonfree. Jeśli nie
-włączono tego repozytorium wcześniej, należy je włączyć po ponownym
-uruchomieniu komputera.</para>
+  <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be
+explicitly enabled to access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you
+should do this after your first reboot.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_chooser.xml
index 29b23ae4..992a6b04 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_chooser.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Konfiguracja Karty Graficznej i Monitora</title>
   </info>
@@ -8,57 +7,56 @@
 
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
 you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are
 all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window
 System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for
-<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or
-any other graphical environment to work well, the following
-<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct
-settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a
-choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect.</para>
+<acronym>KDE</acronym> Plasma, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>,
+<acronym>LXDE</acronym> or any other graphical environment to work well, the
+following <acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the
+correct settings if none are shown, or if you think the details are
+incorrect.</para>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Karta graficzna</guibutton></emphasis>: Wybierz swoją
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Karta graficzna</guibutton></emphasis>: Wybierz swoją
 kartę graficzną z listy.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
-<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor
-from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel>
-list. Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the
-horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> if applicable, or choose your monitor from
+the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. Choose
+<guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and
+vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
 
       <warning>
-        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Niepoprawna wartość odświeżania może uszkodzić monitor</para>
+        <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a" revision="1">Niepoprawna wartość odświeżania może uszkodzić monitor</para>
       </warning>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired
-resolution and color depth of your monitor here.</para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: The resolution and
+color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
-always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your
-settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your
-settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be
-kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen
-and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make
-sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't
-available</emphasis></para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
+always appear during install. If the option is there, and you test your
+settings, you should be ask whether your settings are correct. If you answer
+<emphasis role="bold">yes</emphasis>, the settings will be kept. If you
+don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be able to
+reconfigure everything until the test result is satisfactory. If the test
+option is not available, then make sure your settings are on the safe side.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to
 enable or disable various options.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_monitor.xml
index ae2bf770..fbf1f49c 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_monitor.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -1,11 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_monitor" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   
 
   
@@ -18,26 +11,26 @@
     <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
 <!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
 <!-- tproof -->
-<!-- lproof -->
+<!---->
 <title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Wybór monitora</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1" revision="1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
 correctly identify yours.</para>
 
   <warning>
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage
-your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing
-what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor
-documentation</para>
+    <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics
+could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something
+without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
   </warning>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
-format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Własny</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis>Własny</emphasis></para>
 
   <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh
 rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
@@ -49,15 +42,14 @@ type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
 may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
 consult your monitor documentation.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6" revision="1">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
 monitor database.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Dostawca</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7" revision="1"><emphasis>Dostawca</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8" revision="1">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
 one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
         <para>dostawca</para>
@@ -72,12 +64,12 @@ one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist></para>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9" revision="1"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as
-1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
-often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver
-when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it
-may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10" revision="1">selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the <emphasis
+role="bold">Vesa</emphasis> card driver when your video hardware cannot be
+determined automatically. Once again it may be wise to be conservative in
+your selections.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/diskdrake.xml
index 0a543e70..b2d83904 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/diskdrake.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/diskdrake.xml
@@ -1,47 +1,61 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="diskdrake">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="diskdrake">
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6
 
 Lebarhon 20170902 added SC-->
 <title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Zaawansowany podział na partycje za pomocą DiskDrake</title>
   </info>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-diskdrake.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <warning>
-    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">Jeśli chcesz zaszyfrować swoją partycję <literal>/</literal> musisz się
-upewnić że posiadasz oddzielną partycję <literal>/boot</literal>. Partycja
-<literal>/boot</literal> nie może być zaszyfrowana, ponieważ uniemożliwiłoby
-to uruchomienie systemu.</para>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>
+partition you must ensure that you have a separate <emphasis
+role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition. The encryption option for the
+<emphasis role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition must NOT be set, otherwise
+your system will be unbootable.</para>
   </warning>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa3" revision="2">Adjust the layout of your disk(s)  here. You can remove or create
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa3" revision="2">Modify the layout of your disk(s)  here. You can remove or create
 partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even
-view what is in them before you start.</para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa4" revision="1">Dla każdego wykrytego dysku lub innego urządzenia, jak USB, prezentowana
-jest oddzielna karta. Na przykład sda, sdb i sdc jeśli zostały wykryte trzy
-urządzenia. </para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa5" revision="1">Kliknij <guibutton>Wyczyść wszystko</guibutton>, aby usunąć wszystkie
-partycje znajdujące się na wybranym dysku.</para>
+view their details before you start.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa4" revision="1">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage
+device like a USB key). In the screen-shot above there are two available
+devices: <emphasis role="bold">sda </emphasis>and <emphasis
+role="bold">sdb</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa5" revision="1">Take care with the <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> option, use it only if
+you are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6" revision="1">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
 or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe
-it. <guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton> (or <guibutton>Expert
-mode</guibutton>) gives some more tools like to add a label or to choose a
-partition type. </para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Kontynuuj aż do momentu gdy skonfigurujesz wszystko zgodnie ze swoimi
-preferencjami.</para>
+it. <guibutton>Expert mode</guibutton> provides more options such as a label
+(give a name to) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa7" revision="1">Jeśli wszystko zostało już ustawione kliknij <guibutton>Gotowe</guibutton>.</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are installing Mageia on an UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI
-System Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)</para>
-    <para><mediaobject><imageobject condition="classical"><imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"
-align="center"/></imageobject><imageobject condition="live"><imagedata
-align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+    <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System
+Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
+align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
   </note>
+
   <note>
     <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot
 partition is present and of the correct type</para>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/doPartitionDisks.xml
index 58a2a7bc..6f283297 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/doPartitionDisks.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!---->
 <!-- lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6
@@ -8,73 +10,162 @@
 lebarhon 20170209 added SC-->
 <title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Partycjonowanie</title>
   </info>
-  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="1">Na tym ekranie możesz zobaczyć zawartość twoich twardych dysków oraz
-propozycje instalatora dotyczące instalacji
-<application>Magei</application>.</para>
-  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="1">Opcje dostępne na liście poniżej są zależne od podziału twojego dysku
-twardego oraz jego zawartości.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the
+DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="1">The options available from those shown below will vary according to the
+layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist><listitem><para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Użyj istniejących partycji</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="1">Jeśli dostępna jest ta opcja, oznacza to że zostały znalezione partycje
-linuksowe i mogą być użyte do instalacji.</para></listitem><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="1">Wykorzystaj wolne miejsce</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Jeśli posiadasz nieużywane miejsce na dysku (niesformatowane), może być ono
-wykorzystane do instalacji Magei.</para></listitem><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1">Wykorzystaj wolne miejsce na partycji Windows</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9" revision="1">Jeśli masz niewykorzystane miejsce na partycji Windows, instalator
-zaproponuje, aby je wykorzystać.</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">To może być użyteczne rozwiązanie, aby przygotować miejsce na instalację
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Użyj istniejących partycji</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="1">Jeśli dostępna jest ta opcja, oznacza to że zostały znalezione partycje
+linuksowe i mogą być użyte do instalacji.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="1">Wykorzystaj wolne miejsce</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Jeśli posiadasz nieużywane miejsce na dysku (niesformatowane), może być ono
+wykorzystane do instalacji Magei.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1">Wykorzystaj wolne miejsce na partycji Windows</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9" revision="1">Jeśli masz niewykorzystane miejsce na partycji Windows, instalator
+zaproponuje, aby je wykorzystać.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">To może być użyteczne rozwiązanie, aby przygotować miejsce na instalację
 Magei, jest to jednak ryzykowna operacja więc powinieneś się upewnić że masz
-kopię zapasową ważnych plików!</para><para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">Zauważ, że ta metoda spowoduje zmniejszenie rozmiaru partycji
+kopię zapasową ważnych plików!</para>
+
+        <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">Zauważ, że ta metoda spowoduje zmniejszenie rozmiaru partycji
 Windows. Partycja musi być "czysta", co oznacza, że Windows musi być
 poprawnie zamknięty za ostatnim razem gdy był używany. Musi być także
 zdefragmentowany, choć to nie daje pewności że wszystkie pliki zostały
 przesunięte poza obszar dysku, który zostanie użyty. Dlatego też bardzo
-wskazane jest zrobienie kopii zapasowej ważnych plików.</para><para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in
-light blue and the future Mageia partition in dark blue with their intended
-sizes just under. You have the possibility to adapt these sizes by clicking
-and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the screen-shot below.</para><mediaobject><imageobject condition="classical"><imagedata
-fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"
-align="center"/></imageobject><imageobject condition="live"><imagedata
-fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></listitem></itemizedlist> <itemizedlist><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="1">Wymaż i wykorzystaj cały dysk</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13" revision="1">Ta opcja użyje całego dysku dla Magei.</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14" revision="1">Zauważ! WSZYSTKIE dane z wybranego dysku zostaną wymazane. Uważaj!</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15" revision="1">Jeśli chcesz używać części tego dysku do czegoś innego, albo już masz na
-dysku dane, których nie chcesz stracić, nie używaj tej opcji.</para></listitem></itemizedlist><itemizedlist><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16" revision="1">Custom disk partitioning</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17" revision="1">Ta opcja daje Ci całkowitą kontrolę nad sposobem przeprowadzenia instalacji.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
+wskazane jest zrobienie kopii zapasowej ważnych plików.</para>
+
+        <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in
+light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their
+intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by
+clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following
+screen-shot.</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="1">Wymaż i wykorzystaj cały dysk</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13" revision="1">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14" revision="1">Zauważ! WSZYSTKIE dane z wybranego dysku zostaną wymazane. Uważaj!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15" revision="1">Jeśli chcesz używać części tego dysku do czegoś innego, albo już masz na
+dysku dane, których nie chcesz stracić, nie używaj tej opcji.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16" revision="1">Custom disk partitioning</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17" revision="1">Ta opcja daje Ci całkowitą kontrolę nad sposobem przeprowadzenia instalacji.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
   <para><emphasis role="bold">Partition sizing:</emphasis></para>
-  <para>Instalator podzieli obecną przestrzeń odnosząc się do następujących zasad:</para>
-  <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>Jeżeli całkowita dostępna przestrzeń jest mniejsza niż 50GB, to tylko jedna
-partycja zostanie utworzona dla /, nie ma oddzielnej partycji dla /home.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Jeżeli całkowita dostępna przestrzeń wynosi więcej niż 50GB, to zostaną
-utworzone trzy partycje</para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>6/19 całkowitej dostępnej przestrzeni zostaje przydzielona do /, jednak
-maksimum wynosi 50 GB</para></listitem><listitem><para>1/19 przestrzeni zostanie przydzielona jako swap, jednak maksimum wynosi 4
-GB</para></listitem><listitem><para>Cała reszta (conajmniej 12/19) zostanie przydzielone dla /home</para></listitem></itemizedlist></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
-  <para>Oznacza to, że z 160 GB lub więcej dostępnej przestrzeni instalator utworzy
-trzy partycje: 50GB dla /, 4GB dla swap i całą resztę dla /home.</para>
+
+  <para>If you are not using the <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk
+partitioning</emphasis> option, the installer will allocate the available
+space according to the following rules:</para>
+
+  <para><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is
+created. This will be the <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis> (root)
+partition.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions
+are created</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <emphasis
+role="bold">/</emphasis> with a maximum of 50 GB</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>1/19 przestrzeni zostanie przydzielona jako swap, jednak maksimum wynosi 4
+GB</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <emphasis
+role="bold">/home.</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>That means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will
+create three partitions: 50 GB for <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>, 4 GB
+for <emphasis role="bold">swap</emphasis> and the remainder for <emphasis
+role="bold">/home</emphasis>.</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are using an UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
-automatically detected, or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on
-/boot/EFI. The "Custom disk partitioning" option is the only one that allows
-to check it has been correctly done</para>
+    <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
+automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on
+/boot/EFI. The <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>
+option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly done</para>
   </note>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are using a Legacy (as known as CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk,
-you need to create a Bios boot partition if not already existing. It is an
-about 1 MiB partition with no mount point. Choose <xref
-linkend="diskdrake"/> to be able to create it with the Installer like any
-other partition, just select BIOS boot partition as filesystem type.</para>
+    <para>If you are using a Legacy (CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk, you need to
+create a BIOS boot partition if not already existing. It is a roughly 1 MiB
+partition with no mount point. Choose <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> to be able
+to create it with the Installer like any other partition, just select BIOS
+boot partition as the filesystem type.</para>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
 condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </note>
+
   <warning>
-    <para>Niektóre nowe dysku używają 4096 bitowych sektorów logicznych, zamiast
-wcześniej standardowych 512 bitowych. Z powodu braku takiego sprzętu,
-narzędzie do partycjonowania użyte w instalatorze nie zostało przetestowane
-z takim dyskiem. Sugerujemy wcześniejsze przygotowanie takiego dysku, za
-pomocą innego narzędzia jak np. gparted. przy użyciu następujących ustawień:</para>
-    <para>"Align to" "MiB"</para>
-    <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2"</para>
-    <para>Należy się także upewnić, aby wszystkie utworzone partycje miały parzystą
-liczbę megabajtów.</para>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the
+partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a
+drive. Also some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you
+have such a device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using
+an alternative partitioning tool like <emphasis
+role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, and to use the following settings:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para>
   </warning>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/exitInstall.xml
index 5b03d04d..17248838 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/exitInstall.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/exitInstall.xml
@@ -1,20 +1,27 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Gratulacje</title>
   </info>
+
   
+
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC-->
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
 align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">Instalacja i konfiguracja <application>Magei</application>została
 zakończona, teraz można bezpiecznie usunąć nośnik instalacyjny i uruchomić
 komputer ponownie.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating
-systems on your computer (if you have more than one).</para>
+systems (if there are more than one) on your computer.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install
 will be automatically selected and started.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Enjoy!</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Jeśli masz jakieś pytania, bądź chciał(a)byś dołączyć do pojektu Mageia -
 odwiedź www.mageia.org</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/firewall.xml
index 45882456..479c0c49 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/firewall.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/firewall.xml
@@ -3,31 +3,29 @@
     <title xml:id="firewall-ti1">Firewall</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para xml:id="firewall-pa1" revision="1">This section allows to configure some simple firewall rules: they determine
-which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the target
-system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the system to be
-accessible from the Internet.</para>
-
-  <para>In the default setting, no button is checked - no service of the system is
-accessibly from the network. The "<emphasis>Everything (no
-firewall)</emphasis>" button has a particular role: it enables access to all
-services of the machine - an option that does not make much sense in the
-context of the installer since it would create a totally unprotected
-system.  Its veritable use is in the context of the Mageia Control Center
-(which uses the same GUI layout) for temporarily disabling the entire set of
-firewall rules for testing and debugging purposes.</para>
-
-  <para>All other checkbuttons are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you
-will check the "CUPS server" button if you want printers on your machine to
-be accessible from the network.</para>
+  <para xml:id="firewall-pa1" revision="1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they
+determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the
+target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the
+system to be accessible from the Internet.</para>
+
+  <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is
+accessible from the network. The <emphasis role="bold">Everything (no
+firewall)</emphasis> enables access to all services of the machine - an
+option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since
+it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the
+context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for
+temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and
+debugging purposes.</para>
+
+  <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will
+enable the <emphasis role="bold">CUPS server</emphasis> if you want printers
+on your machine to be accessible from the network.</para>
 
   <para><emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para>The set of checkbuttons only comprises the most common services. The
-"Advanced" button allows to enable messages that correspond to a service for
-which no checkbutton exists. The "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>" button
-opens a window where you can enable a series of services by typing a list of
-couples (blank separated)</para>
+  <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where
+you can enable a series of services by typing a list of couples (blank
+separated)</para>
 
   <para><emphasis>&lt;port-number>/&lt;protocol></emphasis></para>
 
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/formatPartitions.xml
index 9317850d..6f07bba9 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/formatPartitions.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="formatPartitions">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="formatPartitions" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatowanie</title>
   </info>
@@ -7,43 +6,38 @@
   
 
   
+
   
+
   
-  
-  
-  
-  
-  
-   <mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
-<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
-condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
-  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Tutaj możesz wybrać, które partycje chcesz sformatować. Wszystkie dane na
-partycjach <emphasis>nie</emphasis> zaznaczonych do formatowania zostaną
-zachowane.</para>
-
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Zazwyczaj przynajmniej te partycje, które zaznaczył instalator, powinny być
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"
+align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live">
+<imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1" align="center"
+fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1" revision="2">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1">Zazwyczaj przynajmniej te partycje, które zaznaczył instalator, powinny być
 sformatowane</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Kliknij na <guibutton>Zaawansowane</guibutton> aby wybrać, które partycje
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3" revision="1">Kliknij na <guibutton>Zaawansowane</guibutton> aby wybrać, które partycje
 mają zostać sprawdzone na obecnoś tzw. <emphasis>bad bloków</emphasis></para>
 
   <tip>
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">Jeśli nie jesteś pewien swojego wyboru, możesz kliknąć
-<guibutton>Wstecz</guibutton>, jeszcze raz <guibutton>Wstecz</guibutton>, a
-następnie <guibutton>Zaawansowany podział na partycje</guibutton>, aby
-dostać się do głównego okna.  Na tym ekranie możesz sprawdzić co znajduje
-się na Twoich partycjach.</para>
+    <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
+and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen,
+where you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para>
   </tip>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">Jeśli jesteś zadowolony ze swojego wyboru, kliknij
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">Jeśli jesteś zadowolony ze swojego wyboru, kliknij
 <guibutton>Dalej</guibutton> aby kontynuować.</para>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installUpdates.xml
index 246f2d66..ea79e373 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installUpdates.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installUpdates.xml
@@ -1,31 +1,30 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installUpdates" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Aktualizacje</title>
+  </info>
 
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Aktualizacje</title></info>
+  
 
+  
 
+  
 
+  
 
- 
- 
- 
-
-   <mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
 <!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
-format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject> 
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+align="center" revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
- <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Od czasu gdy ta wersja <application>Magei</application> została
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa1" revision="1">Od czasu gdy ta wersja <application>Magei</application> została
 udostępniona, niektóre pakiety zostały zaktualizowane lub poprawione.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Wybierz <guilabel>tak</guilabel> jeśli chcesz je pobrać i zainstalować,
-wybierz <guilabel>nie</guilabel> jeśli nie chcesz tego teraz robić lub jeśli
-nie masz połączenia z Internetem</para>
-
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Kliknij <guibutton>Dalej</guibutton> aby kontynuować</para>
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa2" revision="1">Choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them,
+select <guilabel>No</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
 
-</section>
-  
\ No newline at end of file
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa3" revision="1">Press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installer.xml
index 36ba9906..ba7f5c62 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installer.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/installer.xml
@@ -1,6 +1,13 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="installer">
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="installer"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
   <info>
-    <title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">DrakX instalator Mageia</title>
+    <title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX instalator Mageia</title>
   </info>
 
   <para>Niezależnie czy jesteś początkującym, czy zaawansowanym użytkownikiem
@@ -18,70 +25,88 @@ potrzebujesz.</para>
       <title>Using a Mageia DVD</title>
 
       <para>Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one
-with an UEFI system and the second one with a Legacy system:</para>
+is what you will see if you have a UEFI system, the second one is for a
+Legacy system:</para>
 
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-      <para>From this screen, you can access to options by pressing the "e" letter to
-enter the "edit mode". To come back to this screen, press either the key
-"esc" to quit without saving or press the key "Ctrl" or "F10" to quit with
-saving.</para>
+      <para>From this screen, you have access to options by pressing "<emphasis
+role="bold">e</emphasis>" to enter the edit mode. To come back to this
+screen, press either <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> key to quit
+without saving or press the key <emphasis role="bold">Ctrl</emphasis> or
+<emphasis role="bold">F10</emphasis> to quit with saving.</para>
 
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-      <para>From this screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:<itemizedlist>
+      <para>From this screen, it is possible to set some preferences (note that the
+options <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> to <emphasis
+role="bold">F6</emphasis> are available only on Legacy systems):<itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Język (tylko dla procesu instalacji, może być inny niż ten, który wybierzesz
-dla zainstalowanego systemu) poprzez wciśnięcie klawisza F2</para>
+            <para>Within any of the <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to <emphasis
+role="bold">F6</emphasis> options, you can view relevant help by pressing
+<emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist></para>
+
+      <para><itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to have the installer use a
+specific language for the installation.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-            <para>Użyj strzałek aby wybrać język i naciśnij ENTER.</para>
-
-            <para>Dla przykładu zaprezentowany jest ekran powitalny w języku francuskim,
-pochądzący z wersji LiveDVD. Zauważ, że menu LiveCD/DVD nie zawiera
-pozycji:<guilabel>System ratunkowy</guilabel>, <guilabel>Test
-pamięci</guilabel> oraz <guilabel>Program do detekcji sprzętu</guilabel>.</para>
-
-            <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome4fr.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+            <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language then press <emphasis
+role="bold">Enter</emphasis>.</para>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para> Aby zmienić rozdzielczość ekranu wciśnij F3.</para>
+            <para>If needed, change the screen resolution by pressing <emphasis
+role="bold">F3</emphasis> (Legacy mode only).</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para>Możesz dodać parametry dla jądra za pomocą klawisza<emphasis
-role="bold">F6</emphasis> lub klawisza <emphasis role="bold">e</emphasis> w
-trybie UEFI.</para>
-
-            <para>Jeśli instalacja się nie powiedzie, może zajść potrzeba uruchomienia jej z
-jedną z tych dodatkowych opcji. Menu wywoływane klawiszem F6 wyświetli nam
-nową linię <guilabel>Opcje uruchamiania</guilabel> oraz zaproponuje cztery
-opcje:</para>
-
-            <para>- Domyślne - nie zmienia żadnej z domyślnych opcji.</para>
-
-            <para>- Domyślne - nie zmienia żadnej z domyślnych opcji.</para>
-
-            <para>- Bez ACPI - bez zarządzania energią.</para>
-
-            <para>- Bez lokalnego APIC - ma związek z przerwaniami procesora.</para>
+            <para>If you experience problems with the installation, you could try modifying
+the default settings using the <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> <emphasis
+role="bold">Kernel Options</emphasis> (for UEFI systems press <emphasis
+role="bold">e</emphasis> instead).</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Default: It doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Safe Settings: Priority is given to the safer options at the price of a
+performance detriment.</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>No ACPI: (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface): Power management
+features are not used.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>No Local APIC: (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller): CPU
+interrupt. Select this option if you experience system misbehaviour like a
+kernel panic in relation to APIC.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
 
             <para>When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options
 displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para>
 
             <note>
-              <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with the
-key F6 does not appear in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line,
-however, they are really taken into account.</para>
+              <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with
+<emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> do not appear in the <guilabel>Boot
+Options</guilabel> line, despite this, they will in fact be applied.</para>
             </note>
 
             <mediaobject>
@@ -89,25 +114,25 @@ however, they are really taken into account.</para>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para>Add more kernel options by pressing the key F1 (Legacy mode only).</para>
-
-            <para>Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options.  Select one with
-the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to
-go back to the welcome screen.</para>
+            <para>Pressing <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> opens a help window for various
+boot options. Select an item with the arrow keys and press <emphasis
+role="bold">Enter</emphasis> for more details or press <emphasis
+role="bold">Esc</emphasis> to go back to the welcome screen.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-            <para>The detailed view about the option splash. Press Esc or select
-<guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to go back to the options
-list. These options can by added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot
-options</guilabel> line.</para>
+            <para>The detailed view about the splash option. Press <emphasis
+role="bold">Esc</emphasis> or select <guilabel>Return to Boot
+Options</guilabel> to go back to the options list. These options can be
+added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
             <note>
-              <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with the F2 key.</para>
+              <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with <emphasis
+role="bold">F2</emphasis>.</para>
             </note>
 
             <para>For more information about kernel options on legacy and UEFI systems, see:
@@ -116,53 +141,30 @@ ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options">https://wiki.
           </listitem>
         </itemizedlist></para>
     </section>
-
-    <section>
-      <title>Using a Wired Network</title>
-
-      <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based
-Installation CD (netinstall.iso or netinstall-nonfree.iso images):</para>
-
-      <para>It does not allow to change the language, the available options are
-described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired
-Network-based Installation CD, see <link
-ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install">the Mageia
-Wiki</link></para>
-
-      <warning>
-        <para>The keyboard layout is the American one.</para>
-      </warning>
-
-      <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../dx-help.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-    </section>
   </section>
 
   <section>
     <title>Etapy instalacji</title>
 
-    <para>Proces instalacji jest podzielony na kilka etapów, możesz je śledzić po
-lewej stronie ekranu instalatora.</para>
+    <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, the status of which
+is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para>
 
-    <para>Każdy etap zawiera jeden lub więcej ekranów, które mogą także mieć przycisk
-<guibutton>Zaawansowane</guibutton>, który umożliwia dostęp do rzadziej
-używanych opcji.</para>
+    <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> sections with extra, less commonly required,
+options.</para>
 
-    <para>Większość ekranów posiada przycisk <guibutton>Pomoc</guibutton>, który
-pozwala na zapoznanie się z wyjaśnieniami dotyczącymi aktualnego etapu
-instalacji.</para>
+    <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons for further details
+about the particular step.</para>
 
     <note>
-      <para>Jeśli w którymś momencie instalacji zdecydujesz się ją przerwać, istnieje
-możliwość ponownego uruchomienia komputera, lecz należy sie nad tym poważnie
-zastanowić. W chwili gdy partycje zostały już sformatowane lub rozpoczęła
-się instalacja pakietów, twój komputer nie jest już w takim samym stanie jak
-wcześniej, ponowne uruchomienie w tym momencie najprawdopodobniej spowoduje,
-że system nie będzie zdatny do użytku. Jeśli masz pewność, że chcesz
-ponownie uruchomić komputer, możesz przejśc do terminala tekstowego
-wciskając jednocześnie klawisze<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton>. Następnie
-zrebootuj komputer za pomocą klawiszy <guibutton>Alt Ctrl
-Delete</guibutton>.</para>
+      <para>If at some points during the install you decide to stop the installation, it
+is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
 
@@ -182,9 +184,11 @@ użyć niskiej rozdzielczości wpisując w linii komend <code>vgalo</code>.</par
         <listitem>
           <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
 possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use
-this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be
-presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit
-ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.</para>
+this press <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> at the first welcome screen
+and confirm with <emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis>. You will be
+presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and press
+<emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis> to continue with the installation in
+text mode.</para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
@@ -201,22 +205,20 @@ pominięta. Wpisz w linii komend <code>noauto</code>. Ta opcja może być
     <section>
       <title>Problem z pamięcią RAM</title>
 
-      <para>To są rzadkie przypadki, jednak czasem zdarza się, że system zgłasza
-niepoprawnie ilość dostępnej pamięci RAM. Aby określić ją manualnie wpisz
-parametr <code>mem=xxxM</code>, gdzie xxx jest poprawną ilością dostępnej
-pamięci RAM wyrażoną w MB, np. <code>mem=256M</code> oznacza 256MB.</para>
+      <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
     </section>
 
     <section>
       <title>Dynamiczne partycje</title>
 
-      <para>If you converted your hard disk from "basic" format to "dynamic" format on
-Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia on
-this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation:
-<link
+      <para>If you converted your hard disk from <emphasis role="bold">basic</emphasis>
+format to <emphasis role="bold">dynamic</emphasis> format in Microsoft
+Windows, then it is not possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert
+to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link
 ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
-
-  <section/>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/media_selection.xml
index dcbd19ca..b9ccdde0 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/media_selection.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/media_selection.xml
@@ -4,17 +4,21 @@
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
 <!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
-format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="media_selection-im1"
+align="center" revision="1" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>Tutaj jest lista dostępnych repozytoriów. Nie wszystkie repozytoria są
 dostępne, zależy to od nośników jakie wykorzystujesz do instalacji. Wybór
@@ -36,11 +40,11 @@ firmware dla niektórych kart WIFI, itp.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Repozytorium <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> zawiera pakiety wydane na wolnych
-licencjach. Głównym powodem umieszczenia tych pakietów w tym repozytorium
-jest fakt, że mogą one naruszać prawa patentowe w niektórych krajach,
-np. kodeki multimedialne, pakiety potrzebne do odtwarzania komercyjnych płyt
-DVD, itp.</para>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/minimal-install.xml
index 41d264c6..dcb7b7e9 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/minimal-install.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/minimal-install.xml
@@ -1,13 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="minimal-install"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-	 xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to
  start a new page-->
 <!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
@@ -16,22 +7,27 @@
   </info>
 
   
+
   
 
-  <para>Możesz przeprowadzić Minimalną instalację poprzez odznaczenie wszystkich
-grup pakietów na ekranie Wybór grup pakietów, zobacz <xref
-linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
-  <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the "Individual package selection"
-option in the same screen.</para>
+  <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the
+Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para>
+
+  <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis role="bold">Individual
+package selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para>
+
   <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
-their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
-workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the "Individual
-package selection" option mentioned above, to fine-tune your installation,
-see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
-  <para>Jeśli wybierzesz ten typ instalacji, zostanie ci zaprezentowanych kilka
-użytecznych opcji, jak dokumentacja czy X Window.</para>
-  <para>If selected, "With X" will also include IceWM as lightweight desktop
-environment.</para>
+<application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
+workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the <emphasis
+role="bold">Individual package selection</emphasis> option mentioned above,
+to fine-tune your installation, see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para>
+
+  <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen will offer
+you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para>
+
+  <para>If <emphasis role="bold">With X</emphasis> is chosen, then IceWM (a
+lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para>
+
   <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of man and info pages.  It
 contains the man pages from the <link
 xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation
@@ -40,9 +36,7 @@ xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU
 coreutils</link> info pages.</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
-  </section>
-
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/misc-params.xml
index a1f3f90c..5ed15193 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/misc-params.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/misc-params.xml
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@
 <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC-->
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on
-the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the
-settings here and change them if you want after pressing
+  <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want by pressing
 <guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para>
 
   <note>
-    <para>As a general rule, default settings are recommended and you can keep them
-with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
+    <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings
+unless:<itemizedlist>
         <listitem>
           <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para>
         </listitem>
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
         </listitem>
 
         <listitem>
-          <para>something else is said in the detailed sections below</para>
+          <para>some other factor mentionned in the detailed sections below is an issue.</para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist></para>
   </note>
@@ -40,16 +40,15 @@ with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Strefa czasowa</guilabel></para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred
-language. You can change it if needed. See also <xref
-linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. You
+can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
         <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><guilabel>Kraj / Region</guilabel></para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you
-correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the
+setting.  See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub2</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c" revision="2">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para>
       </listitem>
@@ -72,8 +71,8 @@ correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><guilabel>Usługi</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run the background
-(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background
+(daemons).  This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may
 prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para>
@@ -92,8 +91,8 @@ prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Klawiatura</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on
-your location, language or type of keyboard.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type
+of keyboard.</para>
 
         <note>
           <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind
@@ -111,9 +110,9 @@ etc.</para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Karta dźwiękowa</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option
-to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one
-driver for your card, but none of them is the default one.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer uses the default driver - if there is a default one. The
+option to select a different driver is only given when there is more than
+one driver for your card, but where none of them is the default one.</para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
@@ -140,12 +139,12 @@ align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></me
         <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Sieć</guilabel>:</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
-drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the <application>Mageia
 Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media
 repositories.</para>
 
         <warning>
-          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor
 that interface as well.</para>
         </warning>
       </listitem>
@@ -158,7 +157,7 @@ internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a
 proxy service.</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you
-need to enter here</para>
+need to enter here.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
   </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/securityLevel.xml
index bf04fc9f..97ebc93e 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/securityLevel.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/securityLevel.xml
@@ -1,32 +1,40 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="securityLevel">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Poziom bezpieczeństwa</title>
+  </info>
 
+  
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Poziom bezpieczeństwa</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
- 
- 
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended
+setting for the average user. The <emphasis role="bold">Secure</emphasis>
+setting will create a highly protected system - for instance if the system
+is to be used as a public server.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">You can adjust your security level here.</para>
+  <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa2" revision="1">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will
+send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations
+which require notification to a system administrator.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose.</para>
+  <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter &lt;user>@localhost -
+where &lt;user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para>
 
-    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
-in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
-  </section>
+  <note>
+    <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool
+messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore
+be configured for receiving such mail!</para>
+  </note>
 
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
+in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectCountry.xml
index 26272592..268efd4b 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectCountry.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectCountry.xml
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@ like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
 can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para>
 
   <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other
-Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there.</para>
+Countries</guilabel> option and choose your country / region there.</para>
 
   <note>
     <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list,
-after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the
-first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real
+after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem that a country from the
+first list was chosen. Please ignore this, as DrakX will apply your actual
 choice.</para>
   </note>
 
@@ -33,14 +33,15 @@ choice.</para>
 input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
 multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
 default input method, so users should not need to configure it
-manually. Other input methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar
+manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar
 functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package
 selection.</para>
 
     <note>
       <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
-after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" ->
-"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para>
+after you boot your installed system via <emphasis role="bold">Configure
+your Computer</emphasis> -> <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis>, or by
+running localedrake as root.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectInstallClass.xml
index 8a99a7e8..6a43c20b 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectInstallClass.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -1,12 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
   
 
   
@@ -14,6 +6,7 @@
   
 
   
+
   
 
   <info>
@@ -27,48 +20,50 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
-format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
       <para>Zainstaluj</para>
 
-      <para>Użyj tej opcji dla świeżej instalacji <application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+      <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of
+<application>Mageia</application>. This will format the root partition (/),
+but can preserve a separated /home partition.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
       <para>Uaktualnienie</para>
 
-      <para>Jeśli masz jedną lub więcej instalacji <application>Magei</application> w
-swoim komputerze, instalator pozwala na uaktualnienie jednej z nich do
-najnowszej wersji.</para>
+      <para>This can be used to upgrade an existing installation of
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
 
-<warning>
-	<para>Tylko uaktualnienie z poprzedniej wersji Magei, która była <emphasis>nadal
-wspierana</emphasis>, w momencie ukazania się wersji którą chcesz
-instalować, została gruntownie przetestowana. Jeśli chcesz aktualizować
-starszą wersję Magei, zalecamy przeprowadzenie świeżej instalacji bez
-formatowania partycji <literal>/home</literal>.</para>
-</warning>
+      <warning>
+        <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still
+supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been
+thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached
+its End Of Life, then it is better to do a clean install instead while
+preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para>
+      </warning>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
   <note>
-    <para>Jeśli podczas instalacji zdecydujesz się ją przerwać, jest taka możliwość,
-należy to jednak dobrze przemyśleć. Gdy są już sformatowane partycje lub gdy
-zaczęły już się instalować pakiety, twój komputer nie jest już w takim samym
-stanie jak przed instalacją, ponowne uruchomienie go w tej chwili może
-spowodować, że system będzie nieużywalny. Jeśli jesteś pewien, że przerwanie
-instalacji to dobry pomysł, przejdź do terminala za pomocą <guilabel>Alt
-Ctrl F2</guilabel>. Następnie wciśnij <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</guilabel>,
-aby zrestartować komputer.</para>
+    <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to
+reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been
+formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in
+the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an
+unusable system. If in spite of that, and only if you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing <guilabel>Alt
+Ctrl F2</guilabel> simultaneously. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
   </note>
 
   <tip>
-    <para>Jeśli zorientujesz się, że zapomniałeś wybrać dodatkowy język, możesz cofnąć
-się  z ekranu "Instalacja/Uaktualnienie do ekranu wyboru języka za pomocą
-<guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. <emphasis>Nie </emphasis> próbuj tego
-podczas dalszych etapów instalacji.</para>
+    <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the <emphasis role="bold">Install or Upgrade</emphasis>
+screen to the language choice screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Home</guilabel> simultaneously. <emphasis role="bold">Do not</emphasis> do
+this later in the install.</para>
   </tip>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectKeyboard.xml
index 5ccd8df0..13c42eee 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectKeyboard.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -1,11 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectKeyboard" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   
 
   
@@ -16,17 +9,17 @@
 <title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Klawiatura</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX wybiera odpowiedni układ klawiatury do twojego języka. Jeśli nie
+  <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="1">DrakX wybiera odpowiedni układ klawiatury do twojego języka. Jeśli nie
 znaleziono odpowiedniego układu klawiatury, wybrany będzie domyślny układ
 klawiatury US.</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" />
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" align="center"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Upewnij się, że zaproponowany wybór jest odpowiedni lub wybierz inny układ
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2" revision="1">Upewnij się, że zaproponowany wybór jest odpowiedni lub wybierz inny układ
 klawiatury. Jeśli nie wiesz jaki układ jest odpowiedni dla twojej
 klawiatury, sprawdź dokumentację lub zapytaj dostawcę sprzętu. Może się
 zdarzyć że na klawiaturze znajdziesz etykietę z potrzebną informacją. Możesz
@@ -35,23 +28,23 @@ xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">Jeśli twoja klawiatura nie znajduje się na pokazanej liście, kliknij na
-<guibutton>More</guibutton>, aby zobaczyć pełną listę i wybrać z niej swoją
-klawiaturę.</para>
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3" revision="1">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on
+<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard
+there.</para>
 
       <para revision="1"><warning>
           <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog,
 you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though
-a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly
-and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the
-full list.</para>
+a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this and
+continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will be
+applied.</para>
         </warning></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
-extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin
-and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the
+Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectLanguage.xml
index 16b96f34..c0a11971 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectLanguage.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -1,9 +1,14 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="selectLanguage">
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
@@ -14,36 +19,46 @@
        up mess made of this header by xxe -->
 <title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Wybór języka</title>
   </info>
+
   <para condition="classical">Wybierz preferowany język, najpierw rozwijając listę dla swojego
 kontynentu. <application>Mageia</application> będzie używać wybranego języka
 zarówno podczas instalacji jak i w zainstalowanym systemie.</para>
+
   <para condition="live">Select your preferred language.  <application>Mageia</application> will use
 this selection during the installation and for your installed system.</para>
-  <para condition="classical">Jeśli potrzebujesz mieć kilka języków zainstalowanych w systemie, dla siebie
-lub innych użytkowników, możesz użyć przycisku <guibutton>Więcej
-języków</guibutton> aby je teraz dodać.  </para>
+
+  <para condition="classical">If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be
+installed on your system, then you should use the <guibutton>Multiple
+languages</guibutton> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add
+extra language support after installation.</para>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
 fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-language.png"
 format=""/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <warning condition="classical">
-    <para>Nawet jeśli chcesz zainstalować więcej niż jeden język, musisz najpierw
-wybrać jeden z nich jako domyślny w głównym oknie wyboru języka. Będzie on
-również zaznaczony jako domyślny w oknie wyboru wielu języków.</para>
+    <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your
+preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be marked as
+chosen in the multiple languages screen.</para>
   </warning>
+
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem condition="classical">
       <para>Jeśli język twojej klawiatury nie jest taki sam jak język, który wybierasz
 jako domyślny, należy zainstalować także język odpowiedni do twojej
 klawiatury.</para>
     </listitem>
+
     <listitem>
       <para>Mageia używa wsparcia UTF-8 (Unicode) domyślnie.</para>
-      <para condition="classical">Jeśli wiesz, że to kodowanie nie jest odpowiednie dla twojego języka, możesz
-wyłączyć wsparcie dla UTF-8 w oknie "więcej języków". Będzie to dotyczyć
-wszystkich zainstalowanych języków.</para>
+
+      <para condition="classical">This may be disabled in the <emphasis role="bold">Multiple
+languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your
+language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages.</para>
     </listitem>
+
     <listitem>
       <para>Po instalacji możesz zmienic domyslny język uzywany w systemie za pomocą
 Centrum Sterowania Mageia -> System -> Zarządzanie lokalizacją systemu</para>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloader.xml
index 2cf4ce4d..e646bd7b 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloader.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="setupBootloader">
   
-
   
-
   <info>
     <!---->
 <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page
@@ -10,217 +8,137 @@
 Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6.  20170209 updated SC-->
 <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Podstawowe opcje programu rozruchowego</title>
   </info>
-
   <section>
     <title>Bootloader interface</title>
-
     <para>By default, Mageia uses exclusively:</para>
-
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system</para>
+        <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system</para>
       </listitem>
-
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2-efi for a UEFI system.</para>
+        <para>GRUB2-efi for a UEFI system.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
-
     <tip>
       <para>The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)</para>
     </tip>
-
     <section>
-      <title>Grub2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems</title>
-
+      <title>GRUB2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems</title>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"
 fileref="live-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
-      <para>Nie modyfikuj "Boot Device", chyba że masz pojęcie, co robisz.</para>
+      <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you
+really know what you are doing.</para>
     </section>
-
     <section>
-      <title>Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</title>
-
-      <para>With an UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot
-choose between with or without graphical menu</para>
-
+      <title>GRUB2-efi on UEFI systems</title>
+      <para>With a UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot
+choose between the <emphasis role="bold">with</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">without graphical menu</emphasis> options.</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-setupBootloader2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
       <para>If Mageia is the only system installed on your computer, the installer
-created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to receive the bootloader
-(Grub2-efi). If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your
+created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to house the bootloader
+(GRUB2-efi). If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your
 computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer detects the existing
-ESP created by Windows and adds grub2-efi. Although it is possible to have
-several ESPs, only one is advised and enough whatever the number of
+ESP created by Windows and adds GRUB2-efi. Although it is possible to have
+several ESPs, only one is required (and advised), whatever the number of
 operating systems you have.</para>
-
-      <para>Nie modyfikuj "Boot Device", chyba że masz pojęcie, co robisz.</para>
+      <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you
+really know what you are doing.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title xml:id="setupMageiaBootloader">Używanie bootloader'a Magei</title>
-
-    <para>By default, according to your system, Mageia writes a new:</para>
-
+    <para>By default, and according to your system, Mageia writes one of the
+following:</para>
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first hard
-drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para>
+        <para>a GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first
+hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para>
       </listitem>
-
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2-efi bootloader into the ESP</para>
+        <para>a GRUB2-efi bootloader into the ESP</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
-
     <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to
 add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour,
-click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then uncheck the box
-<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para>
-
+click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then untick the <emphasis
+role="bold">Probe Foreign OS</emphasis> option.</para>
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
 condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title>Użyj istniejącego bootloader'a.</title>
-
     <para>The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader
-is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve
-running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and
-add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in
-question.</para>
+is beyond the scope of this documentation, however in most cases it will
+involve running the relevant bootloader installation program which should
+detect and add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating
+system in question.</para>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title xml:id="setupChainLoading">Using chain loading</title>
-
-    <para>If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS,
+    <para>If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain-load it from another OS,
 click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton>, then on
-<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and Check the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and tick the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP
 or MBR</guilabel>.</para>
-
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
     <para>You will get a warning that the bootloader is missing, ignore it by clicking
 <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
-
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title>Opcje</title>
-
     <section>
       <title>First page</title>
-
-      <para><itemizedlist>
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This text box
-lets you set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is
-started up.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the
-bootloader. This means a username and password will be asked at the boot
-time to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is "root"
-and the password is the one chosen here after.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: This text box is where you actually put the
-password</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and Drakx will
-check that it matches with the one set above.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel></para>
-
-            <itemizedlist>
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power
-Interface) is a standard for the power management. It can save energy by
-stopping unused devices, this was the method used before APM. Unchecking it
-could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if
-you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance
-random reboots or system lockups).</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables / disables symmetric
-multiprocessing for multi core processors.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: Enabling or disabling this gives the
-operating system access to the Advanced Programmable Interrupt
-Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and Advanced
-IRQ (Interrupt Request)  management.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Here you can set local APIC, which
-manages all external interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system.</para>
-              </listitem>
-            </itemizedlist>
-          </listitem>
-        </itemizedlist></para>
+      <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This lets you
+set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is started up.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the
+bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting
+to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is <emphasis
+role="bold">root</emphasis> and the password is the one chosen here-after.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Choose a password for the bootloader.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and DrakX will
+check that it matches with the one above.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel></para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power
+Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by
+stopping unused devices.  Deselecting it could be useful if, for example,
+your computer does not support ACPI or if you think the ACPI implementation
+might cause some problems (for instance random reboots or system lockups).</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables/disables symmetric
+multiprocessing for multi core processors.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: This gives the operating system access to
+the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more
+complex priority models, and Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Local APIC manages all external
+interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
     </section>
-
     <section>
       <title>Next page</title>
-
       <itemizedlist>
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Default:</guilabel> Operating system started up by default</para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Append:</guilabel> This option lets you pass the kernel
 information or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots.</para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Probe foreign OS</guilabel>: see above <link
 linkend="setupMageiaBootloader">Using a Mageia bootloader</link></para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
-          <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel><itemizedlist>
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth
-the boot menu will use. If you click the down triangle you will be offered
-other size and colour depth options.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><emphasis role="bold">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link
-linkend="setupChainLoading">Using the chain loading</link></para>
-              </listitem>
-            </itemizedlist></para>
+          <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth
+to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down triangle you will be
+offered other size and colour depth options.</para></listitem><listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link
+linkend="setupChainLoading">Using the chain loading</link></para></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
index 94a98f06..55a58015 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -1,15 +1,19 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry">
   
+
   <info>
     <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page
 
 Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6-->
 <title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Dodaj lub zmodyfikuj wpis Boot Menu</title>
   </info>
-  <para>To do that you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the
-software grub-customizer instead (Available in the Mageia repositories).</para>
+
+  <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the
+software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead
+(available in the Mageia repositories).</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>For more information, see our wiki: <link
+    <para>For more information, see: <link
 ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para>
   </note>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupSCSI.xml
index 68df6c66..90d92adc 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupSCSI.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -1,27 +1,23 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Wykrywanie SCSI</title>
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
-   
-  
-  
+
   
+
   
+
   
-   <mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
@@ -30,16 +26,15 @@
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
-format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">Zazwyczaj DrakX wykrywa twarde dyski poprawnie. Jednak w przypadku
-niektórych starszych kontrolerów SCSI może nie być w stanie wykryć
-odpowiedniego sterownika i w efekcie nie rozpoznać dysku.</para>
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older
+SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use
+and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para>
 
-  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">Jeśli zaistnieje taka sytuacja,  zostaniesz poproszony, aby ręcznie wskazać,
-który dysk SCSI posiadasz.</para>
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell DrakX which SCSI drive(s)
+you have.</para>
 
-  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX powinien być wtedy w stanie odpowiednio skonfigurować  dysk(i).</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3" revision="3">DrakX powinien być wtedy w stanie odpowiednio skonfigurować  dysk(i).</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/soundConfig.xml
index b37df75a..bc8c0726 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/soundConfig.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/soundConfig.xml
@@ -11,8 +11,7 @@
 xml:id="soundConfig-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your
-sound card is given, which will be the default driver if we have a default
-one.</para>
+sound card is given, which will be the default driver if one exists.</para>
 
   <para>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install
 you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start
@@ -20,21 +19,22 @@ this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the
 <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound
 Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen.</para>
 
-  <para>Then, in the draksound or "Sound Configuration" tool screen, click on
-<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on
-<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find very useful advice about how
-to solve the problem.</para>
+  <para>Then, in the <emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">Sound Configuration</emphasis> tool screen, click on
+<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find useful advice about how to
+solve the problem.</para>
 
   <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">Zaawansowane</title>
     </info>
 
-    <para>Clicking <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> in this screen, during install, is
-useful if there is no default driver and there are several drivers
-available, but you think the installer selected the wrong one.</para>
+    <para>Clicking <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Advanced</guibutton></emphasis> in
+this screen, during install, is useful if there is no default driver and
+there are several drivers available, but you think the installer selected
+the wrong one.</para>
 
-    <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on
-<guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on <emphasis
+role="bold"><guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton></emphasis>.</para>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
index d73d9ea0..94ee46eb 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm" version="5.0" xml:lang="pl">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Formatowanie twardego dysku</title>
   </info>
@@ -7,7 +6,7 @@
   
 
   
-  
+
   
 
   
@@ -19,16 +18,15 @@
     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
     saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
-<imageobject condition='live'> <imagedata
-fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata
-fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Kliknij <guibutton>Wstecz</guibutton> jeśli nie jesteś pewien swojego
-wyboru.</para>
+  <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are at all unsure about your
+choice.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Kliknij <guibutton>Dalej</guibutton> jeśli jesteś pewien że chcesz wymazać
-każdą partycję, każdy system operacyjny oraz wszystkie dane z twardego
-dysku.</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to proceed if you are sure that it is
+ok to erase every partition, every operating system and all data that might
+be on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/uninstall-Mageia.xml
index 487d10c8..4d053e67 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/uninstall-Mageia.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/pl/uninstall-Mageia.xml
@@ -7,32 +7,29 @@ Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.-->
 
   
 
-  <section>
-    <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti2">Co i jak</title>
-
-    <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly, in short
-you want get rid of it. That is your right and Mageia also gives you the
+  <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short
+you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the
 possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para>
 
-    <para>After your data backup, reboot your installation Mageia DVD and select
-Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will
-only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system.</para>
+  <para>After your data backup, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select
+<emphasis role="bold">Rescue system</emphasis>, then, <emphasis
+role="bold">Restore Windows boot loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you
+will only have Windows, with no option to choose your operating system.</para>
 
-    <para>To recover the space used by Mageia partitions on Windows, click on
+  <para>In Windows to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on
 <code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management
--> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition
-management. You will recognize the Mageia partition because they are labeled
-<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their size and place in the
-disk. Right click on each of these partitions and select
-<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>. The space will be freed.</para>
+-> Storage -> Disk Management</code>. You will recognize a Mageia partition
+because they are labeled <guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their
+size and place on the disk. Right click on each of these partitions and
+select <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to free up the space.</para>
 
-    <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it
+  <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it
 (FAT32 or NTFS). It will get a partition letter.</para>
 
-    <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the
-existing partition that is at the left of the freed space.  There are other
-partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both
-windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and
-make sure all important things have been backed up.</para>
-  </section>
+  <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the
+existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other
+partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis
+role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As
+always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything
+important to you.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
index 3fb74ad6..e7e193c2 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
@@ -8,23 +8,21 @@ Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about
   </info>
   <section>
     <title>Introducere</title>
-    <para>Mageia este distribuită prin imagini ISO. Această pagină vă va ajuta să
-alegeți imaginea care se potrivește nevoilor voastre.</para>
-    <para>Există două familii de medii:</para>
+    <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose
+which image best suits your needs.</para>
+    <para>There are two families of media:</para>
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>Instalatorul clasic: După ce ați demarat de pe mediul de instalare, va urma
-un proces care vă va permite să alegeți ce să instalați și cum să vă
-configurați sistemul de destinație. Acest procedeu vă conferă maximul de
-flexibilitate pentru personalizarea instalării, oferindu-vă în mod
-particular posibilitatea de a alege mediul de birou pe care doriți să-l
-instalați.</para>
+        <para>Classical installer: Booting with this media provides you with the maximum
+flexibility when choosing what to install, and for configuring your
+system. In particular, you have a choice of which Desktop environment to
+install</para>
       </listitem>
       <listitem>
-        <para>Mediul LIVE: Puteți demara de pe mediul de instalare un sistem real Mageia
-fără să-l instalați pentru a putea vedea ce veți obține după
-instalare. Procesul de instalare este mai simplu, însă aveți mai puține
-opțiuni.</para>
+        <para>LIVE media: This option allows you to try out Mageia without having to
+actually install it, or make any changes to your computer.  If the
+installation is decided, the process is simpler, but you get fewer choices
+than offered by the Classical installer</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
     <para>Detaliile sînt oferite în secțiunile următoare.</para>
@@ -33,11 +31,11 @@ opțiuni.</para>
     <title>Medii</title>
     <section>
       <title>Definiție</title>
-      <para>Aici, un mediu (plural: medii) este o imagine ISO ce permite instalarea
-și/sau actualizarea distribuției Mageia și prin extensie orice suport fizic
-pe care poate fi copiat fișierul ISO.</para>
-      <para>Le puteți găsi <link
-ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">aici</link>.</para>
+      <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to
+install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support (DVD, USB
+stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para>
+      <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link
+ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
       <title>Mediile de instalare clasice</title>
@@ -45,14 +43,14 @@ ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">aici</link>.</para>
         <title>Caracteristici comune</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Aceste imagini ISO utilizează instalatorul tradițional numit drakx.</para>
+            <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called drakx.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Acestea sînt capabile să efectueze o instalare nouă sau o actualizare de la
-o versiune precedentă.</para>
+            <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously
+installed version of Mageia.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Diferitele medii pentru arhitectură pe 32 sau 64 de biți.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Unele unelte sînt disponibile în ecranul de întîmpinare: Recuperare sistem,
@@ -74,19 +72,19 @@ proprietare.</para>
         <title>Caracteristici comune</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Poate fi utilizat pentru a previzualiza distribuția Mageia fără a o instala
-și opțional să o instalați pe discul dur.</para>
+            <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install
+it. Can also be used to install Mageia if you wish.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce).</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Diferitele medii pentru arhitectură pe 32 sau 64 de biți.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para><emphasis role="bold">Imaginile Live ISO pot fi utilizate doar pentru a
-efectua instalări noi, nu pot fi utilizate pentru actualizări majore de la
-versiunile precedente.</emphasis></para>
+            <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean
+installations, they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia
+releases.</emphasis></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Acestea conțin aplicații proprietare.</para>
@@ -100,7 +98,7 @@ versiunile precedente.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Plasma desktop environment only.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Toate limbile sînt prezente.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>64 bit architecture only.</para>
@@ -114,7 +112,7 @@ versiunile precedente.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Doar mediul de birou GNOME.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Toate limbile sînt prezente.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>64 bit architecture only</para>
@@ -128,7 +126,7 @@ versiunile precedente.</emphasis></para>
             <para>Xfce desktop environment only.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Toate limbile sînt prezente.</para>
+            <para>All available languages are present.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
@@ -137,28 +135,27 @@ versiunile precedente.</emphasis></para>
       </section>
     </section>
     <section>
-      <title>CD-uri doar pentru demarat</title>
+      <title>Net install media</title>
       <section>
         <title>Caracteristici comune</title>
         <itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Fiecare din ele este o mică imagine care nu conține mai mult decît necesarul
-pentru a lansa instalatorul drakx și a găsi drakx-installer-stage2 sau alte
-pachete necesare pentru a continua și finaliza instalarea. Aceste pachete se
-pot afla pe discul calculatorului, pe un disc local, într-o rețea locală sau
-pe Internet.</para>
+            <para>These are minimal ISO's containing no more than that which is needed to
+start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages
+that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be
+on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the
+Internet.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Aceste medii sînt foarte lejere (mai puțin de 100 Mo) și sînt convenabile
-pentru cazurile cînd lățimea de bandă este prea mică pentru a descărca un
-DVD întreg, pentru un calculator fără unitate de DVD sau pentru un
-calculator care nu poate demara de pe o cheie USB.</para>
+            <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if
+bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a
+DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Diferitele medii pentru arhitectură pe 32 sau 64 de biți.</para>
+            <para>Different media for 32 and 64 bit architectures.</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Doar limba engleză.</para>
+            <para>First steps are English language only.</para>
           </listitem>
         </itemizedlist>
       </section>
@@ -187,60 +184,67 @@ persoanele care au nevoie de ele.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Descărcare</title>
       <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or
-BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the
-mirror in use and an opportunity to change if the bandwidth is to low. If
-http is chosen, you may also see something like</para>
+BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as
+the mirror in use and an option to switch if the bandwidth is too low. If
+http is chosen, you will also see something regarding checksums.</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of
-them. Keep one of them <link linkend="integrity">for further
-usage</link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:</para>
+      <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Choose one or the
+other, and copy the checksum <link linkend="integrity">for later
+use</link>. Then a window similar to this one appears:</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para>Bifați butonul radio „Salvează fișierul”.</para>
+      <para>Select the Save File option, then, click OK.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
       <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title>
-      <para>Both checksums are hexadecimal numbers calculated by an algorithm from the
-file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this
-number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your
-downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a
-failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download or attempt a
-repair using BitTorrent.</para>
-      <para>Deschideți o consolă, trebuie să fiți root, și:</para>
-      <para>- Pentru a utiliza md5sum, tastați: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum
+      <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an
+algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of
+your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the
+checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not
+match, and if it is the case, then you should retry the download or attempt
+a repair using BitTorrent.</para>
+      <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need
+to be root), and:</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use md5sum, type: <userinput>md5sum
 path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
-      <para>- Pentru a utiliza sha1sum, tastați: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum
-path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
-      <para>și comparați numărul obținut pe calculator (va trebui să așteptați un pic)
-cu numărul dat de Mageia. Exemplu:</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>To use sha1sum, type: <userinput>sha1sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      <para> Example:</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Md5sum.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-      <para/>
+      <para>and compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the checksum
+provided by Mageia.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
   <section>
     <title>Inscripționați sau copiați imaginea ISO</title>
-    <para>Imaginea ISO verificată poate fi acum inscripționată pe un CD/DVD sau pusă
-pe o cheie USB. Aceste operații nu sînt simple copieri și au ca scop să
-producă medie de pe care se poate demara.</para>
+    <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or dumped to a USB
+stick. This is not a standard copy operation as a bootable medium will
+actually be created.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Inscripționarea imaginii ISO pe un CD/DVD</title>
-      <para>Puteți utiliza orice aplicație de inscripționat doriți, însă asigurați-vă că
-este configurată corect pe <emphasis role="bold">inscripționat o
-imagine</emphasis>, opțiunea de inscripționat date sau fișiere nu este
-potrivită. Mai multe informații găsiți în <link
-ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">Mageia
-wiki</link>.</para>
+      <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an <emphasis
+role="bold">image</emphasis> is used, burn <emphasis
+role="bold">data</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">files</emphasis> is not
+correct. See <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia
+wiki</link> for more information.</para>
     </section>
     <section>
       <title>Puneți imaginea ISO pe o cheie USB</title>
       <para>Toate imaginile ISO Mageia sînt hibride, asta înseamnă că pot fi „puse” pe o
 cheie USB pentru a demara și instala sistemul.</para>
       <warning>
-        <para>„punerea” unei imagini pe un dispozitiv de memorie flash distruge orice
-sistem de fișiere aflat înainte pe acel dispozitiv; toate datele vor fi
-pierdute și capacitatea partiției va fi redusă la mărimea fișierului ISO.</para>
+        <para>"Dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on
+the device; any existing data will be lost and the partition capacity will
+be reduced to the image size.</para>
       </warning>
       <para>Pentru a recupera capacitatea inițială va trebui să repartiționați și să
 reformatați cheia USB.</para>
@@ -252,25 +256,30 @@ ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks"
       <section>
         <title>Utilizînd o unealtă grafică din Windows</title>
         <para>Puteți încerca:</para>
-        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> utilizînd
-opțiunea „ISO image";</para>
-        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32
-Disk Imager</link></para>
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the
+"ISO image" option;</para>
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk
+Imager</link></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
       </section>
       <section>
         <title>Utilizînd linia de comandă dintr-un sistem GNU/Linux</title>
         <warning>
-          <para>Este potențial „periculos” să faceți acest lucru manual. Riscați să
-suprascrieți o partiție pe disc dacă aveți un ID de dispozitiv greșit.</para>
+          <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting
+potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para>
         </warning>
-        <para>Puteți utiliza utilitarul dd într-o consolă:</para>
         <orderedlist>
           <listitem>
             <para>Deschideți o consolă</para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Deveniți root cu comanda <userinput>su -</userinput> (nu uitați liniuța de
-la final '-' )</para>
+            <para>Become a root (Administrator) user with the command <userinput>su
+-</userinput> (don't forget the final '-' )</para>
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
           </listitem>
@@ -282,10 +291,16 @@ gestionar de fișiere pentru a o citi)</para>
             <para>Introduceți comanda <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para>
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-            <para>Alternativ, puteți obține numele dispozitivului cu comanda
-<code>dmesg</code>, la sfîrșit veți vedea numele dispozitivului începînd cu
-<emphasis>sd</emphasis>, sau <emphasis>sdd</emphasis> în acest caz:</para>
-            <screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
+          </listitem>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example
+<code>/dev/sdb</code> in the screenshot above, it is an 8GB USB stick.</para>
+            <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command
+<code>dmesg</code>: towards the end of this example, you can see the device
+name starting with <emphasis>sd</emphasis>, and in this case,
+<emphasis>sdd</emphasis> is the actual device. You can also see that its
+size is 2GB:</para>
+            <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd
 [72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000
 [72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
 [72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device
@@ -302,27 +317,30 @@ gestionar de fișiere pentru a o citi)</para>
 [72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found
 [72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through
 [72595.967251]  <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1
-[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen>
-          </listitem>
-          <listitem>
-            <para>Găsiți numele cheii USB (după mărime), de exemplu, în imaginea de mai sus
-<code>/dev/sdb</code> este o cheie USB de 8 Go.</para>
+[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Introduceți comanda: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX
-bs=1M</userinput></para>
-            <para>Unde X=numele dispozitivului, ex: /dev/sdc</para>
-            <para>Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso
-of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput></para>
+            <para>Enter the command: <emphasis role="bold"># <userinput>dd
+if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para>
+            <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdd</para>
+            <para>Example:<emphasis role="bold"> # <userinput>dd
+if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/sdd
+bs=1M</userinput></emphasis></para>
+            <tip>
+              <para>It might helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands for
+<emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile
+and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands for <emphasis
+role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para>
+            </tip>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
             <para>Introduceți comanda: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para>
           </listitem>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Deconectați cheia USB, ați terminat.</para>
+            <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para>
           </listitem>
         </orderedlist>
       </section>
     </section>
   </section>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/acceptLicense.xml
index fd4aefab..531964e3 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/acceptLicense.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -35,11 +35,11 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"
-revision="4" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-license.png"/>
-</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="acceptLicense-im2"
-revision="5" align="center" condition="live" format="PNG"
-fileref="live-license.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center"
+revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5"
+align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <section xml:id="license">
     <info>
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ cu atenție contractul de licență.</para>
     <para>Contractul de licență se aplică întregii distribuții
 <application>Mageia</application> și trebuie acceptat înainte de a continua.</para>
 
-    <para>Pentru a-l accepta, apăsați pe <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> și apoi pe
-<guibutton>Înainte</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>To proceed, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
 
     <para>Dacă ați decis să nu-l acceptați, atunci vă mulțumim că ați aruncat o
 privire. Apăsați pe <guibutton>Terminare</guibutton> și calculatorul va
@@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ Release Notes</para>
 
     
 
-    <para>Pentru a vedea noutățile acestei versiuni de
-<application>Mageia</application>, apăsați pe butonul <guibutton>Nota
-ediției</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>Important information about this release of
+<application>Mageia</application> can be viewed by clicking on the
+<guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button.</para>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/addUser.xml
index aad03a14..0a3849cb 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/addUser.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/addUser.xml
@@ -1,108 +1,112 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="addUser">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="addUser">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">Gestionare utilizatori și administratori</title>
   </info>
+
   
+
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)-->
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
 fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" align="center" revision="1"
 xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata
 format="PNG" fileref="live-user1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <section xml:id="root-password">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Definiți parola administratorului (root):</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Pentru toate instalările de <application>Mageia</application> se recomandă
-să definiți o parolă de superutilizator sau administrator, cunoscută și ca
-<emphasis>parolă root</emphasis> în Linux. În timp ce tastați parola în
-căsuța de sus, culoarea scutului se va schimba de la roșu către verde în
-funcție de puterea parolei. Un scut verde indică o parolă puternică. Va
-trebui să retastați parola în căsuța de dedesubt, astfel se vor compara cele
-două parole pentru a vă asigura că nu ați tastat greșit.</para>
+
+    <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to
+set a <emphasis role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (administrator) password,
+usually called the <emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type
+a password into the top box a shield will change from red to yellow to green
+depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are
+using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box
+underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped.</para>
+
     <note xml:id="givePassword">
-      <para>Toate parolele sînt sensibile la majuscule și este foarte recomandat să
-utilizați o combinație de litere (majuscule și minuscule), cifre și
-caractere speciale.</para>
+      <para>All passwords are case sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters
+(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
+
   <section xml:id="enterUser">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Introduceți un utilizator</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Adăugați un utilizator la această etapă. Un utilizator dispune de mai puține
-drepturi ca un administrator (root), însă suficiente pentru a putea naviga
-pe Internet, utiliza aplicațiile de birotică, juca jocuri sau orice altceva
-ce un utilizator obișnuit poate face cu calculatorul său.</para>
+
+    <para>Add a user here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the <emphasis
+role="bold">superuser</emphasis> (root), but enough to use the internet,
+office applications or play games and anything else the average user might
+use their computer for.</para>
+
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
         <para><guibutton>Pictogramă</guibutton>: dacă apăsați acest buton va schimba
 pictograma utilizatorului.</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
         <para><guilabel>Nume real</guilabel>: introduceți aici numele real al
 utilizatorului.</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Numele contului</guilabel>: introduceți aici numele contului
-utilizatorului sau lăsați drakx să folosească o versiune a numelui real al
-utilizatorului. <emphasis>Numele contului utilizatorului este sensibil la
-majuscule.</emphasis></para>
+        <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Enter the user login name or let DrakX use
+a version of the user's real name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is
+case sensitive.</emphasis></para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Parolă</guilabel>: tastați aici parola utilizatorului. La capătul
-căsuței de dialog există un scut care indică puterea parolei. (Vedeți și
-<xref linkend="givePassword"/>)</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Type in the user password. There is a shield
+at the end of the text box that indicates the strength of the password. (See
+also <xref linkend="givePassword"/>)</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Parola (din nou)</guilabel>: retastați aici parola utilizatorului
-și drakx va verifica dacă ați tastat aceeași parolă în ambele căsuțe.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password DrakX will
+check that you have not mistyped the password.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
+
     <note>
-      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a both read and write
-protected home directory (umask=0027).</para>
-      <para>You can add all extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration -
+      <para>Any users you added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected (umask=0027).</para>
+
+      <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration -
 Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User
 management</emphasis>.</para>
+
       <para>Drepturile de acces pot fi modificate și după instalare.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
+
   <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced" condition="classical">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Gestionare avansată utilizatori</title>
     </info>
-    <para>Dacă apăsați butonul <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> vi se va prezenta un
-ecran în care veți putea edita parametrii conturilor utilizatorilor pe care
-îi adăugați.</para>
-    <para condition="classical">Adițional, puteți dezactiva sau activa un cont invitat.</para>
-    <warning condition="classical">
-      <para>Tot ceea ce un invitat, conectat cu un cont invitat implicit
-<emphasis>rbash</emphasis>, înregistrează în directorul său /home va fi
-șters la deconectare.  Utilizatorul invitat trebuie să-și salveze fișierele
-importante pe o cheie USB.</para>
-    </warning>
+
+    <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> option allows you to edit further
+settings for the user you are adding.</para>
+
     <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem condition="classical">
-        <para><guilabel>Activează contul invitat</guilabel>: aici puteți activa sau
-dezactiva contul invitat. Contul invitat permite unui invitat să se
-conecteze și să utilizeze un calculator, însă are drepturi mult mai
-restrînse decît un utilizator normal.</para>
-      </listitem>
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>Interpretor</guilabel>: această listă derulantă vă permite să
-schimbați interpretorul folosit de utilizatorul adăugat în etapa precedentă,
-iar opțiunile sînt Bash, Dash și Sh.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop-down list allows you to change the
+shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are
+<emphasis role="bold">Bash</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Dash</emphasis>
+and <emphasis role="bold">Sh</emphasis></para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>ID Utilizator</guilabel>: definiți aici ID-ul pentru utilizatorul
-adăugat în etapa precedentă. ID-ul este un număr. Lăsați gol dacă nu știți
-despre ce este vorba.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the <emphasis
+role="bold">user ID</emphasis> for any user you added in the previous
+screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, then leave it blank.</para>
       </listitem>
+
       <listitem>
-        <para><guilabel>ID Grup</guilabel>: indicați aici ID-ul grupului. Acesta este tot
-un număr, de obicei același cu ID-ul utilizatorului. Lăsați gol dacă nu
-știți despre ce este vorba.</para>
+        <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the <emphasis
+role="bold">group ID</emphasis>. Again, if unsure, leave it blank.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
   </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/add_supplemental_media.xml
index 0624be60..9a9b882f 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/add_supplemental_media.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -1,54 +1,51 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Selectare medii (configurați mediile de instalare suplimentare)</title>
-    </info>
+  </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
-fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
-xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>În acest ecran este afișată lista cu depozitele deja recunoscute. Puteți
-adăuga alte surse de pachete, precum o unitate optică sau o sursă
-distantă. Selecția surselor va determina care pachete vor fi disponibile
-pentru selectat în etapele următoare.</para>
+  <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognized repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source.
+The source selection determines which packages will be available during the
+next steps.</para>
 
   <para>Pentru o sursă de rețea trebuiesc urmate două etape:</para>
 
   <orderedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para>Alegerea și activarea rețelei, dacă nu este deja activată. </para>
+      <para>Alegerea și activarea rețelei, dacă nu este deja activată.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Selectarea unui server alternativ sau specificarea unui URL (prima
-intrare). Prin selectarea unui server alternativ veți avea acces la toate
-depozitele gestionate de Mageia, precum Nonfree, Tainted și Updates. Cu o
-adresă URL puteți desemna un depozit specific sau instalația NFS proprie.</para>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis
+role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis
+role="bold">Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific
+repository or your own NFS installation.</para>
     </listitem>
   </orderedlist>
 
-    <note>
-      <para>Dacă actualizați o instalare pe 64 de biți care conține și pachete pe 32 de
-biți, este recomandat să utilizați acest ecran pentru a adăuga un server
-oglindă bifînd unul din protocoalele de rețea. Imaginea ISO a DVD-ului pe 64
-de biți conține numai pachete pe 64 de biți și noarch, nefiind capabil să
-actualizeze pachetele pe 32 de biți. După adăugarea unui server oglindă,
-instalatorul va găsi acolo pachetele necesare pe 32 de biți.</para>
-     </note>
-
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are updating a 64 bit installation which may contain some 32 bit
+packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by
+ticking one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only contains
+64-bit and noarch packages, it will not be able to update the 32-bit
+packages. However, after adding an online mirror, the installer will find
+the needed 32-bit packages there.</para>
+  </note>
 </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
index e5985b32..ac1f6120 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -1,27 +1,27 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Alegeți punctele de montare</title>
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
@@ -33,57 +33,59 @@
        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
 <!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
 <!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
-<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
-xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
-condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center" format="PNG"
-xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" align="center"
+xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>Aici puteți vedea partițiile Linux care au fost găsite pe acest
 calculator. Dacă nu sînteți de acord cu sugestiile făcute de
 <application>DrakX</application>, puteți modifica punctele de montare.</para>
 
   <note>
-    <para>Dacă modificați totul, asigurați-vă că încă mai aveți partiția
-<literal>/</literal> (rădăcină).</para>
+    <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <emphasis
+role="bold"><literal>/</literal></emphasis> (root) partition.</para>
   </note>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para>Fiecare partiție este afișată după cum urmează: „Dispozitiv” („Capacitate”,
-„Punct de montare”, „Tip”).</para>
+      <para>Every partition is shown to the left as: <emphasis role="bold">Device
+(capacity, mount point, type).</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>„Dispozitiv” este alcătuit din: „disc dur”, [„numărul discului
-dur”(literă)], „numărul partiției” (de exemplu: „sda5”).</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Device</emphasis>, is made up of: <emphasis
+role="bold">hard drive</emphasis>, [<emphasis role="bold">hard drive
+name</emphasis> (letter)], <emphasis role="bold">partition number</emphasis>
+(for example, <emphasis role="bold">sda5</emphasis>).</para>
     </listitem>
 
-    
     <listitem>
-      <para>Dacă aveți multe partiții, puteți alege mai multe puncte de montare diferite
-din meniul derulant, precum <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal>
-și <literal>/var</literal>. Puteți chiar să vă creați propriile puncte de
-montare, de exemplu <literal>/video</literal> pentru o partiție unde aveți
-filmele, sau <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> pentru partiția
-<literal>/home</literal> a unei instalări de Cauldron.</para>
+      <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different mount
+points from the drop down menu, such as <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>,
+<emphasis role="bold"><literal>/home</literal></emphasis> and <emphasis
+role="bold">/var</emphasis>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <emphasis role="bold"><literal>/video</literal></emphasis> for a
+partition where you want to store your films, or <emphasis
+role="bold">/Data</emphasis> (or some other name) for your data.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Puteți lăsa gol punctul de montare pentru partițiile pentru care nu aveți
-nevoie să le accesați.</para>
+      <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the
+mount point field blank.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
   <warning>
-    <para>Alegeți <guibutton>Înapoi</guibutton> dacă nu sînteți sigur ce să alegeți și
-apoi apăsați pe <guilabel>Partiționare de disc personalizată</guilabel>. În
-ecranul următor puteți face clic pe o partiție pentru a-i afișa tipul și
-mărimea.</para>
+    <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis
+role="bold">Previous</emphasis> to go back and then tick <guilabel>Custom
+disk partitioning</guilabel>, where, you can click on a partition to see its
+type and size.</para>
   </warning>
 
   <para>Dacă nu sînteți sigur că punctele de montare sînt corecte, apăsați pe
 <guibutton>Înainte</guibutton> și alegeți între a formata numai partițiile
 sugerate de DrakX sau mai multe.</para>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/chooseDesktop.xml
index 386c7386..e8767a6b 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/chooseDesktop.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -6,23 +6,23 @@
 
   
 
-  <para>În funcție de alegerea de aici vi se vor prezenta ecrane suplimentare pentru
-a vă afina alegerea.</para>
+  <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to
+fine-tune your choice.</para>
 
-  <para>După etapa de selecție, veți vedea o diaporamă pe parcursul instalării
-pachetelor. Diaporama se poate dezactiva apăsînd pe butonul
-<guilabel>Detalii</guilabel>.</para>
+  <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide-show during package
+installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the
+<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Alegeți dacă preferați să utilizați mediul de birou
-<application>KDE</application> sau <application>Gnome</application>. Ambele
-vin cu o colecție de aplicații și unelte folositoare. Apăsați pe
-<guilabel>Personalizat</guilabel> dacă doriți să le utilizați pe amîndouă,
-nici unul din ele, sau dacă doriți să utilizați altceva decît opțiunile
-implicite ale acestor medii grafice. Biroul <application>LXDE</application>
-este mai lejer decît celelalte două, poate nu atît de plăcut ochiului și cu
-mai puține pachete instalate implicit.</para>
+  <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application>
+<emphasis role="bold">Plasma</emphasis> or <application>GNOME</application>
+desktop environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and
+tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you wish to use neither (or even
+use both), or if you want to modify the default software choices for these
+desktop environments. The <application>LXDE</application> desktop, for
+instance, is lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and
+fewer packages installed by default.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackageGroups.xml
index 772ca620..a905c397 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackageGroups.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -10,30 +10,30 @@
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Pachetele au fost sortate în grupuri pentru a vă facilita alegerea a ceea ce
-este necesar pentru acest sistem. Conținutul grupurilor este evident,
-totuși, informații suplimentare despre conținutul fiecărui pachet sînt
-disponibile în infobule cînd le survolați cu mausul.</para>
+  <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para>Stație de lucru.</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Server.</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Mediu grafic de lucru</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphical Environment</emphasis></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Selectare individuală a pachetelor: puteți utiliza această opțiune pentru a
-adăuga sau înlătura manual pachetele.</para>
+      <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use
+this option to manually add or remove packages</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
-  <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a
+  <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a
 minimal install (without or with X &amp; IceWM).</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackagesTree.xml
index 7bc116ae..e2a71a4b 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackagesTree.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -1,23 +1,21 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Selectare individuală a pachetelor</title>
+  </info>
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Selectare individuală a pachetelor</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
-    
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
-format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-    <para>Aici puteți înlătura sau adăuga pachete suplimentare pentru a vă personaliza
-instalarea.</para>
+  <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your
+installation.</para>
 
-    <para>După ce ați terminat selecția, puteți face clic pe <guibutton>pictograma cu
+  <para>După ce ați terminat selecția, puteți face clic pe <guibutton>pictograma cu
 dischetă</guibutton> din josul paginii pentru a salva lista cu pachetele
 alese (o puteți salva și pe o cheie USB). Puteți apoi utiliza această listă
 pentru a instala aceleași pachete pe un alt sistem, făcînd clic pe același
 buton și alegeți să o încărcați.</para>
-  </section>
-
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureServices.xml
index fd94362c..044bb886 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureServices.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureServices.xml
@@ -1,40 +1,26 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="configureServices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configurați serviciile</title>
+  </info>
 
+  
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configurați serviciile</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
-    
-   
-
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Aici puteți configura care din servicii să (nu) se lanseze la pornirea
-sistemului.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">Sînt patru grupuri, faceți clic pe triunghiul din fața grupului pentru a-l
-destinde și vedea toate serviciile din el.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa3" revision="1">The settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">Configurările alese de DrakX sînt de obicei bune.</para>
-
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">Dacă evidențiați un serviciu, informații despre acesta vor fi afișate în
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">Dacă evidențiați un serviciu, informații despre acesta vor fi afișate în
 infobula de dedesubt.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Faceți modificări numai în cazul în care știți foarte bine ceea ce faceți.</para>
-  </section>
-
+  <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Faceți modificări numai în cazul în care știți foarte bine ceea ce faceți.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
index 9d05b8a7..66a2234d 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configurați fusul orar</title>
   </info>
@@ -10,17 +10,17 @@
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
-xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
-</imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-timeZone.png"
-condition="live" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="live-timeZone.png"
+condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Alegeți fusul orar alegînd țara sau un oraș prin apropiere din același fus
-orar.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your time-zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the
+same time-zone.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">În ecranul următor veți putea configura ceasul intern pe ora locală sau pe
-GMT, cunoscut și ca UTC.</para>
+  <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time
+or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
 
   <note>
     <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">Dacă aveți instalate mai multe sisteme de operare pe acest calculator,
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_card_list.xml
index a905ba44..f4ba4884 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_card_list.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_card_list" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   
 
   
@@ -6,7 +6,9 @@
   
 
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
 <!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
@@ -17,9 +19,9 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
-xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
-format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>DrakX are o bază de date foarte cuprinzătoare de plăci grafice și va
 identifica, în general, corect placa grafică. </para>
@@ -39,23 +41,21 @@ aveți, o puteți alege din arborescență: <itemizedlist>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist></para>
 
-  <para>Dacă nu găsiți placa grafică în lista fabricantului (nu este încă în baza de
-date sau este o placă grafică mai veche) puteți încerca să găsiți un pilot
-potrivit în categoria <emphasis>Xorg</emphasis>.</para>
-
-  <para>Categoria <emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> conține mai mult de 40 de piloți
-generici și cu sursă deschisă de plăci grafice. Dacă nu găsiți un pilot
-corespunzător plăcii voastre grafice, puteți selecționa pilotul
-<emphasis>vesa</emphasis> care oferă funcționalități de bază.</para>
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+<emphasis role="bold">Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40
+generic and open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a
+specific driver for your card there is the option of using the <emphasis
+role="bold">vesa</emphasis> driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
 
-  <para>Aveți grijă că dacă selectați un pilot incompatibil veți avea acces numai la
-interfața în linie de comandă.</para>
+  <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the <emphasis role="bold">Command-line</emphasis> Interface.</para>
 
-  <para>Unii fabricanți de plăci grafice oferă piloți pentru Linux care sînt
-disponibili numai în depozitul Nonfree, iar în unele cazuri aceștia sînt
-disponibili numai pe situl Internet al fabricantului.</para>
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis>
+repository and in some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites.</para>
 
-  <para>Pentru a-i putea accesa, depozitul Nonfree trebuie activat în mod
-explicit. Dacă nu l-ați activat în etapele precedente, trebuie s-o faceți
-după prima repornire.</para>
+  <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be
+explicitly enabled to access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you
+should do this after your first reboot.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_chooser.xml
index 13bff6ec..eb8be5c0 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_chooser.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Configurare placă grafică și ecran</title>
   </info>
@@ -8,57 +7,56 @@
 
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">Indiferent de mediul grafic (cunoscut și ca mediu de birou) ales pentru
-această instalare de <application>Mageia</application>, toate se bazează pe
-o interfață grafică sistem numită  <acronym>X Window System</acronym>, sau
-mai simplu <acronym>X</acronym>. Deci, pentru ca mediile grafice
-<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym>
-sau oricare altul să poată funcționa bine, următorii parametri
-<acronym>X</acronym> trebuie să fie corecți. Alegeți parametrii corecți dacă
-vedeți că <application>DrakX</application> nu a ales nimic, sau dacă credeți
-că alegarea este incorectă. </para>
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
+you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are
+all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window
+System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for
+<acronym>KDE</acronym> Plasma, <acronym>GNOME</acronym>,
+<acronym>LXDE</acronym> or any other graphical environment to work well, the
+following <acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the
+correct settings if none are shown, or if you think the details are
+incorrect.</para>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Placă grafică</guibutton></emphasis>: alegeți placa
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Placă grafică</guibutton></emphasis>: alegeți placa
 grafică din listă dacă este necesar.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: puteți alege
-<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> atunci cînd este cazul, ori unul din lista
-de <guilabel>Fabricanți</guilabel> sau de monitoare
-<guilabel>Generice</guilabel>. Optați pentru
-<guilabel>Personalizat</guilabel> dacă preferați să specificați manual
-ratele de împrospătare orizontale și verticale ale monitorului.</para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> if applicable, or choose your monitor from
+the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list. Choose
+<guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and
+vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
 
       <warning>
-        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Ratele de împrospătare incorecte pot distruge monitorul.</para>
+        <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a" revision="1">Ratele de împrospătare incorecte pot distruge monitorul.</para>
       </warning>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Rezoluție</guibutton></emphasis>: definiți aici
-rezoluția și adîncimea de culori dorite pentru monitor.</para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: The resolution and
+color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: butonul de test nu apare
-mereu în cursul instalării. Dacă este prezent, puteți controla parametrii
-aleși apăsîndu-l. Dacă vedeți un mesaj care vă întreabă dacă parametrii
-aleși sînt corecți, puteți apăsa „da” și configurația va fi păstrată. Dacă
-nu vedeți nimic, veți reveni la ecranul de configurare și veți putea
-reconfigura totul pînă ce testul va fi bun. <emphasis>Dacă butonul nu este
-disponibil, fiți precauți și reverificați parametrii aleși.</emphasis></para>
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
+always appear during install. If the option is there, and you test your
+settings, you should be ask whether your settings are correct. If you answer
+<emphasis role="bold">yes</emphasis>, the settings will be kept. If you
+don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be able to
+reconfigure everything until the test result is satisfactory. If the test
+option is not available, then make sure your settings are on the safe side.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Opțiuni</guibutton></emphasis>: aici puteți activa și
+      <para xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis><guibutton>Opțiuni</guibutton></emphasis>: aici puteți activa și
 dezactiva diverse opțiuni.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_monitor.xml
index a66d03d6..e06b2595 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_monitor.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -1,11 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_monitor" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   
 
   
@@ -18,25 +11,26 @@
     <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
 <!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
 <!-- tproof -->
-<!-- lproof -->
+<!---->
 <title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Alegeți monitorul</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX dispune de o bază de date cu monitoare foarte cuprinzătoare și în
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1" revision="1">DrakX dispune de o bază de date cu monitoare foarte cuprinzătoare și în
 general va identifica în mod corect monitorul.</para>
 
   <warning>
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selectarea unui monitor cu caracteristici diferite poate distruge
-monitorul sau placa grafică. Vă rugăm să nu încercați nimic dacă nu știți ce
-faceți.</emphasis> Dacă aveți dubii consultați documentația monitorului.</para>
+    <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics
+could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something
+without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
   </warning>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
-format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"
+fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" align="center" revision="1"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Personalizat</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis>Personalizat</emphasis></para>
 
   <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">Această opțiune vă permite să specificați doi parametri critici, rata de
 împrospătare verticală și rata orizontală de sincronizare. Rata de
@@ -48,15 +42,14 @@ să nu fie peste capacitățile monitorului: puteți distruge monitorul. Dacă
 aveți dubii, alegeți o configurație conservativă și consultați documentația
 monitorului.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">Aceasta este opțiunea implicită și va încerca să determine tipul monitorului
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6" revision="1">Aceasta este opțiunea implicită și va încerca să determine tipul monitorului
 din baza de date cu monitoare.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Fabricant</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7" revision="1"><emphasis>Fabricant</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">Dacă instalatorul nu a detectat corect monitorul și îi cunoașteți
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8" revision="1">Dacă instalatorul nu a detectat corect monitorul și îi cunoașteți
 referințele, atunci îl puteți alege din arborescență selecționîndu-l în
 ordine: <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
@@ -72,13 +65,12 @@ ordine: <itemizedlist>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist></para>
 
-  <para revision="1"
-  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9" revision="1"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">Selecționarea acestui grup vă permite să alegeți dintre 30 de configurații
-de afișare precum 1024x768 @ 60Hz și cuprinde ecranele plate precum cele
-utilizate în calculatoarele portabile. De obicei este grupul bun de
-monitoare dacă trebuie să utilizați pilotul grafic <emphasis>Vesa</emphasis>
-cînd placa grafică nu poate fi detectată în mod automatic. Încă odată, se
-recomandă să fiți prudent în alegeri.</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10" revision="1">selecting this group will list nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the <emphasis
+role="bold">Vesa</emphasis> card driver when your video hardware cannot be
+determined automatically. Once again it may be wise to be conservative in
+your selections.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/diskdrake.xml
index bfe8e4df..aabd0d5f 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/diskdrake.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/diskdrake.xml
@@ -1,45 +1,61 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="diskdrake">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="diskdrake">
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6
 
 Lebarhon 20170902 added SC-->
 <title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Partiționare de disc personalizată cu DiskDrake</title>
   </info>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-diskdrake.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <warning>
-    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">Dacă doriți să criptați partiția <literal>/</literal> trebuie să vă
-asigurați că aveți o partiție <literal>/boot</literal> separată. NU activați
-criptarea și pe partiția <literal>/boot</literal>, altfel sistemul nu va mai
-putea demara.</para>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>
+partition you must ensure that you have a separate <emphasis
+role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition. The encryption option for the
+<emphasis role="bold">/boot</emphasis> partition must NOT be set, otherwise
+your system will be unbootable.</para>
   </warning>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa3" revision="2">Aici configurați compartimentarea discurilor. Puteți crea și înlătura
-partiții, schimba sistemul de fișiere al unei partiții, sau modifica
-dimensiunea și chiar vizualiza conținutul ei înainte de a începe.</para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa4" revision="1">Este prezentă cîte o categorie pentru fiecare disc detectat sau dispozitiv
-de stocare, precum o cheie USB. De exemplu: sda, sdb și sdc dacă sînt trei. </para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa5" revision="1">Apăsați pe <guibutton>Șterge toate partițiile</guibutton> pentru a șterge
-toate partițiile de pe dispozitivul de stocare selectat.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa3" revision="2">Modify the layout of your disk(s)  here. You can remove or create
+partitions, change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even
+view their details before you start.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa4" revision="1">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage
+device like a USB key). In the screen-shot above there are two available
+devices: <emphasis role="bold">sda </emphasis>and <emphasis
+role="bold">sdb</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa5" revision="1">Take care with the <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> option, use it only if
+you are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6" revision="1">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
 or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe
-it. <guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton> (or <guibutton>Expert
-mode</guibutton>) gives some more tools like to add a label or to choose a
-partition type. </para>
-  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continuați pînă cînd ajustați totul așa cum doriți.</para>
+it. <guibutton>Expert mode</guibutton> provides more options such as a label
+(give a name to) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a" revision="1">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="diskdrake-pa7" revision="1">Apăsați pe <guibutton>Gata</guibutton> cînd sînteți pregătit.</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are installing Mageia on an UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI
-System Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)</para>
-    <para><mediaobject><imageobject condition="classical"><imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"
-align="center"/></imageobject><imageobject condition="live"><imagedata
-align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/></imageobject></mediaobject></para>
+    <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System
+Partition) is present and correctly mounted on /boot/EFI (see below)</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"
+align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
+align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para>
   </note>
+
   <note>
     <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot
 partition is present and of the correct type</para>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/doPartitionDisks.xml
index c3a8a6cf..49f75ca8 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/doPartitionDisks.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!---->
 <!-- lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6
@@ -8,78 +10,164 @@
 lebarhon 20170209 added SC-->
 <title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Partiționare</title>
   </info>
-  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="1">În acest ecran puteți vedea conținutul discurilor dure și soluțiile de
-partiționare găsite de asistentul DrakX unde să instalați
+
+  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the
+DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install
 <application>Mageia</application>.</para>
-  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="1">Opțiunile disponibile din lista de mai jos pot varia în funcție de schema de
-partiționare și conținutul discurilor.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="1">The options available from those shown below will vary according to the
+layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist><listitem><para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Utilizează partițiile existente</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="1">Dacă această opțiune este disponibilă, atunci partițiile existente
-compatibile Linux au fost găsite și pot fi utilizate pentru instalare.</para></listitem><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="1">Utilizează spațiul liber</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Dacă aveți spațiu neutilizat pe discul dur, atunci această opțiune îl va
-utiliza pentru noua instalare de Mageia.</para></listitem><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1">Utilizează spațiul liber de pe o partiție Windows</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9" revision="1">Dacă aveți spațiu neutilizat pe o partiție Windows existentă, instalatorul
-vă poate propune să-l utilizeze.</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">Aceasta poate fi o modalitate foarte practică de a face loc pentru noua
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Utilizează partițiile existente</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="1">Dacă această opțiune este disponibilă, atunci partițiile existente
+compatibile Linux au fost găsite și pot fi utilizate pentru instalare.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="1">Utilizează spațiul liber</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Dacă aveți spațiu neutilizat pe discul dur, atunci această opțiune îl va
+utiliza pentru noua instalare de Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1">Utilizează spațiul liber de pe o partiție Windows</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9" revision="1">Dacă aveți spațiu neutilizat pe o partiție Windows existentă, instalatorul
+vă poate propune să-l utilizeze.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">Aceasta poate fi o modalitate foarte practică de a face loc pentru noua
 instalare de Mageia, însă este o operație riscantă, așa că verificați bine
-că v-ați salvat toate datele importante!</para><para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">Țineți cont că acest lucru implică reducerea dimensiunii partiției
+că v-ați salvat toate datele importante!</para>
+
+        <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">Țineți cont că acest lucru implică reducerea dimensiunii partiției
 Windows. Partiția trebuie să fie „curată”, adică Windows a fost închis
 corect ultima dată cînd a fost utilizat. De asemenea, partiția trebuie să
 fie și defragmentată, cu toate că această operație nu garantează că toate
 fișierele de pe partiție au fost mutate din zona care este pe cale să fie
-utilizată. Este foarte recomandat să vă salvați toate fișierele personale.</para><para>Cu această opțiune, instalatorul afișează partițiile Windows rămase cu
-albastru deschis și viitoarele partiții Mageia cu albastru închis, împreună
-cu dimensiunile lor destinate dedesubt. Aveți posibilitatea să adaptați
-dimensiunile făcînd clic și trăgînd spațiul dintre partiții. A se vedea în
-imaginea de mai jos.</para><mediaobject><imageobject condition="classical"><imagedata
-fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"
-align="center"/></imageobject><imageobject condition="live"><imagedata
-fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></listitem></itemizedlist> <itemizedlist><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="1">Șterge și utilizează tot discul.</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13" revision="1">Această opțiune va utiliza tot discul pentru Mageia.</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14" revision="1">ATENȚIE: aceasta va șterge TOATE datele de pe discul selecționat. Aveți
-grijă!</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15" revision="1">Dacă intenționați să utilizați o parte din disc pentru altceva, sau aveți
+utilizată. Este foarte recomandat să vă salvați toate fișierele personale.</para>
+
+        <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in
+light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their
+intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by
+clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following
+screen-shot.</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
+fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
+fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="1">Șterge și utilizează tot discul.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13" revision="1">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14" revision="1">ATENȚIE: aceasta va șterge TOATE datele de pe discul selecționat. Aveți
+grijă!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15" revision="1">Dacă intenționați să utilizați o parte din disc pentru altceva, sau aveți
 deja date pe disc și nu sînteți pregătit să le pierdeți, atunci nu utilizați
-această opțiune.</para></listitem></itemizedlist><itemizedlist><listitem><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16" revision="1">Custom disk partitioning</para><para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17" revision="1">Aceasta vă oferă controlul total asupra amplasării instalării pe discurile
-dure.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
+această opțiune.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16" revision="1">Custom disk partitioning</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17" revision="1">Aceasta vă oferă controlul total asupra amplasării instalării pe discurile
+dure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
   <para><emphasis role="bold">Partition sizing:</emphasis></para>
-  <para>Instalatorul va împărți spațiul disponibil pe disc după următoarele reguli:</para>
-  <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>Dacă spațiul total disponibil este sub 50 Go, se va crea doar o singură
-partiție pentru /, nu se va crea și o partiție separată pentru /home.</para></listitem><listitem><para>Dacă spațiul total disponibil este de peste 50 Go, atunci se vor crea trei
-partiții</para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>6/19 din spațiul total disponibil va fi alocat pentru / cu un maximum de 50
-Go</para></listitem><listitem><para>1/19 va fi alocat pentru swap cu un maximum de 4 Go</para></listitem><listitem><para>restul spațiului (de cel puțin 12/19) va vi alocat pentru /home</para></listitem></itemizedlist></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
-  <para>Asta înseamnă că de la 160 Go în sus de spațiu disponibil, instalatorul va
-crea trei partiții: 50 Go pentru /, 4 Go pentru swap și restul pentru /home.</para>
+
+  <para>If you are not using the <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk
+partitioning</emphasis> option, the installer will allocate the available
+space according to the following rules:</para>
+
+  <para><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is
+created. This will be the <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis> (root)
+partition.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions
+are created</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <emphasis
+role="bold">/</emphasis> with a maximum of 50 GB</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>1/19 va fi alocat pentru swap cu un maximum de 4 Go</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <emphasis
+role="bold">/home.</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>That means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will
+create three partitions: 50 GB for <emphasis role="bold">/</emphasis>, 4 GB
+for <emphasis role="bold">swap</emphasis> and the remainder for <emphasis
+role="bold">/home</emphasis>.</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are using an UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
-automatically detected, or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on
-/boot/EFI. The "Custom disk partitioning" option is the only one that allows
-to check it has been correctly done</para>
+    <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be
+automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet, and mounted on
+/boot/EFI. The <emphasis role="bold">Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>
+option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly done</para>
   </note>
+
   <note>
-    <para>If you are using a Legacy (as known as CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk,
-you need to create a Bios boot partition if not already existing. It is an
-about 1 MiB partition with no mount point. Choose <xref
-linkend="diskdrake"/> to be able to create it with the Installer like any
-other partition, just select BIOS boot partition as filesystem type.</para>
+    <para>If you are using a Legacy (CSM or BIOS) system with a GPT disk, you need to
+create a BIOS boot partition if not already existing. It is a roughly 1 MiB
+partition with no mount point. Choose <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> to be able
+to create it with the Installer like any other partition, just select BIOS
+boot partition as the filesystem type.</para>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
 condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </note>
+
   <warning>
-    <para>Unele discuri mai noi utilizează sectoare logice de 4096 octeți în locul
-standardului precedent de 512 octeți. Din cauză că nu am dispus de un astfel
-de disc, unealta de partiționare utilizată de instalator nu a fost testată
-în consecință. De asemenea, unele discuri SSD utilizează acum blocuri de
-ștergere de peste 1Mo. Dacă aveți un astfel de disc, vă sugerăm să-l
-partiționați în prealabil cu o unealtă de partiționare alternativă precum
-gparted, sau să folosiți parametrii următori:</para>
-    <para>"Aliniază la" "MiB"</para>
-    <para>"Spațiu liber precedent (MiB)" "2"</para>
-    <para>De asemenea, verificați că toate partițiile sînt create cu un număr par de
-megaocteți.</para>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the
+partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a
+drive. Also some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you
+have such a device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using
+an alternative partitioning tool like <emphasis
+role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, and to use the following settings:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para>
   </warning>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/exitInstall.xml
index 2f00b5b3..3f22bca7 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/exitInstall.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/exitInstall.xml
@@ -1,21 +1,27 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Felicitări</title>
   </info>
+
   
+
   <mediaobject>
 <!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC-->
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
 align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">Ați terminat de instalat și configurat distribuția
 <application>Mageia</application>, iar acum puteți înlătura în siguranță
 mediul de instalare și redemara calculatorul.</para>
-  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">După redemarare, în ecranul încărcătorului de sistem, veți putea alege
-dintre sistemele de operare instalate pe acest sistem (dacă aveți mai mult
-de unul).</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating
+systems (if there are more than one) on your computer.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">Dacă nu ajustați parametrii încărcătorului de sistem, distribuția Mageia va
 fi selectată și pornită automat.</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Profitați!</para>
+
   <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Vizitați www.mageia.org dacă aveți întrebări sau dacă doriți să contribuiți
 la Mageia</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/firewall.xml
index 46ccc6d1..76692586 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/firewall.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/firewall.xml
@@ -3,31 +3,29 @@
     <title xml:id="firewall-ti1">Firewall</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para xml:id="firewall-pa1" revision="1">This section allows to configure some simple firewall rules: they determine
-which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the target
-system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the system to be
-accessible from the Internet.</para>
-
-  <para>In the default setting, no button is checked - no service of the system is
-accessibly from the network. The "<emphasis>Everything (no
-firewall)</emphasis>" button has a particular role: it enables access to all
-services of the machine - an option that does not make much sense in the
-context of the installer since it would create a totally unprotected
-system.  Its veritable use is in the context of the Mageia Control Center
-(which uses the same GUI layout) for temporarily disabling the entire set of
-firewall rules for testing and debugging purposes.</para>
-
-  <para>All other checkbuttons are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you
-will check the "CUPS server" button if you want printers on your machine to
-be accessible from the network.</para>
+  <para xml:id="firewall-pa1" revision="1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they
+determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the
+target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the
+system to be accessible from the Internet.</para>
+
+  <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is
+accessible from the network. The <emphasis role="bold">Everything (no
+firewall)</emphasis> enables access to all services of the machine - an
+option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since
+it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the
+context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for
+temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and
+debugging purposes.</para>
+
+  <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will
+enable the <emphasis role="bold">CUPS server</emphasis> if you want printers
+on your machine to be accessible from the network.</para>
 
   <para><emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis></para>
 
-  <para>The set of checkbuttons only comprises the most common services. The
-"Advanced" button allows to enable messages that correspond to a service for
-which no checkbutton exists. The "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>" button
-opens a window where you can enable a series of services by typing a list of
-couples (blank separated)</para>
+  <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where
+you can enable a series of services by typing a list of couples (blank
+separated)</para>
 
   <para><emphasis>&lt;port-number>/&lt;protocol></emphasis></para>
 
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/formatPartitions.xml
index ecd56c36..bf9cb71e 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/formatPartitions.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="formatPartitions">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="formatPartitions" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatare în curs</title>
   </info>
@@ -7,40 +6,37 @@
   
 
   
+
   
+
   
-  
-  
-  
-  
-  
-   <mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
-<imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject
-condition='live'> <imagedata revision="1"
-fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"
+align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live">
+<imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1" align="center"
+fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Aici puteți alege care din partiții doriți să le formatați. Datele de pe
-partițiile <emphasis>nebifate</emphasis> pentru formatare vor fi păstrate.</para>
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1" revision="2">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">În general trebuiesc formatate cel puțin partițiile selectate de DralX</para>
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1">În general trebuiesc formatate cel puțin partițiile selectate de DralX</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Apăsați pe <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> pentru a alege partițiile pe care
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3" revision="1">Apăsați pe <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> pentru a alege partițiile pe care
 doriți să le verificați de <emphasis>sectoare defecte</emphasis></para>
 
   <tip>
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">Dacă nu sînteți sigur că ați făcut alegerea potrivită, puteți face clic pe
-<guibutton>Înapoi</guibutton>, din nou pe <guibutton>Înapoi</guibutton> și
-apoi pe <guibutton>Personalizat</guibutton> pentru a vă întoarce la ecranul
-principal. În acel ecran puteți alege să vedeți ce se află pe partiții.</para>
+    <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
+and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen,
+where you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para>
   </tip>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">Cînd sînteți sigur de selecția făcută, apăsați pe
+  <para xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">Cînd sînteți sigur de selecția făcută, apăsați pe
 <guibutton>Înainte</guibutton> pentru a continua.</para>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installUpdates.xml
index 4c61e2ce..c7b1793d 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installUpdates.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installUpdates.xml
@@ -1,31 +1,30 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installUpdates" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Actualizări</title>
+  </info>
 
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Actualizări</title></info>
+  
 
+  
 
+  
 
+  
 
- 
- 
- 
-
-   <mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
 <!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
-format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject> 
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+align="center" revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
- <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">De la data lansării acestei versiuni de <application>Mageia</application>,
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa1" revision="1">De la data lansării acestei versiuni de <application>Mageia</application>,
 unele pachete au fost actualizate sau îmbunătățite.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Alegeți <guilabel>da</guilabel> dacă doriți să le descărcați și să le
-instalați, selectați <guilabel>nu</guilabel> dacă nu doriți să faceți acest
-lucru acum, sau dacă nu sînteți conectat la Internet.</para>
-
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Apoi apăsați pe <guibutton>Înainte</guibutton> pentru a continua</para>
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa2" revision="1">Choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them,
+select <guilabel>No</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
 
-</section>
-  
\ No newline at end of file
+  <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa3" revision="1">Press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installer.xml
index 2843160a..27c4be02 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installer.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/installer.xml
@@ -1,6 +1,13 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="installer">
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="installer"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
   <info>
-    <title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">DrakX, instalatorul Mageia</title>
+    <title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, instalatorul Mageia</title>
   </info>
 
   <para>Fie că sînteți un nou utilizator GNU-Linux sau experimentat, instalatorul
@@ -17,73 +24,88 @@ care va lansa instalatorul, care în mod normal este tot ceea ce vă trebuie.</p
       <title>Using a Mageia DVD</title>
 
       <para>Here are the default welcome screens when using a Mageia DVD, The first one
-with an UEFI system and the second one with a Legacy system:</para>
+is what you will see if you have a UEFI system, the second one is for a
+Legacy system:</para>
 
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-      <para>From this screen, you can access to options by pressing the "e" letter to
-enter the "edit mode". To come back to this screen, press either the key
-"esc" to quit without saving or press the key "Ctrl" or "F10" to quit with
-saving.</para>
+      <para>From this screen, you have access to options by pressing "<emphasis
+role="bold">e</emphasis>" to enter the edit mode. To come back to this
+screen, press either <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> key to quit
+without saving or press the key <emphasis role="bold">Ctrl</emphasis> or
+<emphasis role="bold">F10</emphasis> to quit with saving.</para>
 
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-      <para>From this screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:<itemizedlist>
+      <para>From this screen, it is possible to set some preferences (note that the
+options <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> to <emphasis
+role="bold">F6</emphasis> are available only on Legacy systems):<itemizedlist>
           <listitem>
-            <para>Limba (doar pentru instalare, poate fi diferită de limba aleasă pentru
-sistem) apăsînd tasta F2 (numai în modul vechi)</para>
+            <para>Within any of the <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to <emphasis
+role="bold">F6</emphasis> options, you can view relevant help by pressing
+<emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist></para>
+
+      <para><itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Press <emphasis role="bold">F2</emphasis> to have the installer use a
+specific language for the installation.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-            <para>Utilizați tastele săgeți pentru a selecționa limba și apăsați tasta ENTER.</para>
-
-            <para>Aici aveți ca exemplu ecranul de întîmpinare, în franceză, cînd se
-utilizează un Live DVD/CD. Notați că meniul Live DVD/CD nu propune:
-<guilabel>Recuperare sistem</guilabel>, <guilabel>Test de memorie</guilabel>
-și <guilabel>Unealta de detecție materială</guilabel>.</para>
-
-            <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome4fr.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+            <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language then press <emphasis
+role="bold">Enter</emphasis>.</para>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para>Schimbați rezoluția ecranului apăsînd tasta F3 (numai în modul vechi).</para>
+            <para>If needed, change the screen resolution by pressing <emphasis
+role="bold">F3</emphasis> (Legacy mode only).</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para>Adăugați opțiuni nucleului apăsînd tasta <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis>
-pentru modul vechi sau tasta <emphasis role="bold">e</emphasis> pentru modul
-UEFI.</para>
-
-            <para>Dacă instalarea eșuează, atunci poate fi necesar să încercați din nou
-utilizînd una din opțiunile suplimentare. Meniul activat cu F6 afișează o
-linie nouă intitulată <guilabel>Opțiuni de demaraj</guilabel> și propune
-patru intrări:</para>
-
-            <para>- Implicit, nu modifică nimic în opțiunile implicite.</para>
-
-            <para>- Implicit, nu modifică nimic în opțiunile implicite.</para>
-
-            <para>- Fără ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), gestionarea
-energiei nu este luată în considerare.</para>
-
-            <para>- Fără APIC local (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), este
-vorba de întreruperile la nivel de procesor, selectați această opțiune dacă
-sînteți întrebat.</para>
+            <para>If you experience problems with the installation, you could try modifying
+the default settings using the <emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> <emphasis
+role="bold">Kernel Options</emphasis> (for UEFI systems press <emphasis
+role="bold">e</emphasis> instead).</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Default: It doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Safe Settings: Priority is given to the safer options at the price of a
+performance detriment.</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>No ACPI: (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface): Power management
+features are not used.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>No Local APIC: (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller): CPU
+interrupt. Select this option if you experience system misbehaviour like a
+kernel panic in relation to APIC.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
 
             <para>Cînd selecționați una din aceste intrări, se modifică opțiunile implicite
 afișate pe linia <guilabel>Opțiuni de demaraj</guilabel>.</para>
 
             <note>
-              <para>În unele versiuni de Mageia, se poate întîmpla ca intrările selecționate cu
-tasta F6 să nu apară în linia <guilabel>Opțiuni de demaraj</guilabel>, însă
-acestea sînt luate în considerare.</para>
+              <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with
+<emphasis role="bold">F6</emphasis> do not appear in the <guilabel>Boot
+Options</guilabel> line, despite this, they will in fact be applied.</para>
             </note>
 
             <mediaobject>
@@ -91,25 +113,25 @@ acestea sînt luate în considerare.</para>
           </listitem>
 
           <listitem>
-            <para>Adăugați mai multe opțiuni nucleului apăsînd tasta F1 (numai în modul vechi)</para>
-
-            <para>Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options.  Select one with
-the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to
-go back to the welcome screen.</para>
+            <para>Pressing <emphasis role="bold">F1</emphasis> opens a help window for various
+boot options. Select an item with the arrow keys and press <emphasis
+role="bold">Enter</emphasis> for more details or press <emphasis
+role="bold">Esc</emphasis> to go back to the welcome screen.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-            <para>Vederea detaliată a opțiunii splash. Apăsați ESC sau selectați
-<guilabel>Înapoi la opțiunile de demaraj</guilabel> pentru a reveni la lista
-cu opțiuni. Aceste opțiuni pot fi adăugate manual în linia <guilabel>Opțiuni
-de demaraj</guilabel>.</para>
+            <para>The detailed view about the splash option. Press <emphasis
+role="bold">Esc</emphasis> or select <guilabel>Return to Boot
+Options</guilabel> to go back to the options list. These options can be
+added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para>
 
             <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
             <note>
-              <para>Cu tasta F2 aveți ajutorul tradus în limba aleasă.</para>
+              <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with <emphasis
+role="bold">F2</emphasis>.</para>
             </note>
 
             <para>Pentru informații suplimentare despre opțiunile nucleului pe sistemele vechi
@@ -118,49 +140,30 @@ ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_set_up_kernel_options">https://wiki.
           </listitem>
         </itemizedlist></para>
     </section>
-
-    <section>
-      <title>Using a Wired Network</title>
-
-      <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based
-Installation CD (netinstall.iso or netinstall-nonfree.iso images):</para>
-
-      <para>Nu permite schimbarea limbii, opțiunile disponibile sînt descrise direct pe
-ecran. Pentru informații suplimentare despre utilizarea CD-ului de instalare
-prin rețea filară, consultați <link
-ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install">Mageia Wiki</link>.</para>
-
-      <warning>
-        <para>Dispunerea tastaturii este cea americană.</para>
-      </warning>
-
-      <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../dx-help.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-    </section>
   </section>
 
   <section>
     <title>Etapele instalării</title>
 
-    <para>Procesul de instalare este divizat într-un anumit număr de etape, care pot
-fi urmărite în acest panou lateral al ecranului.</para>
+    <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, the status of which
+is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para>
 
-    <para>Fiecare etapă are una sau mai multe ecrane, care pot avea la rîndul lor
-butoane <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> cu opțiuni suplimentare, de obicei
-mai puțin necesare.</para>
+    <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> sections with extra, less commonly required,
+options.</para>
 
-    <para>Majoritatea ecranelor au butoane <guibutton>Ajutor</guibutton> care dau mai
-multe explicații pentru etapa actuală.</para>
+    <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons for further details
+about the particular step.</para>
 
     <note>
-      <para>Dacă vă decideți să opriți instalarea în curs, puteți reporni, dar vă rugăm
-să vă gîndiți de două ori înainte de a face acest lucru. Odată ce o partiție
-a fost formatată, sau actualizările au început să fie instalate,
-calculatorul nu mai este în aceeași stare și repornirea v-ar putea lăsa cu
-un sistem inutilizabil. Dacă în ciuda acestui fapt sînteți foarte sigur că
-doriți să reporniți, deschideți un terminal prin apăsarea celor trei taste
-<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> în același timp, apoi apăsați
-<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultan pentru a reporni.</para>
+      <para>If at some points during the install you decide to stop the installation, it
+is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
 
@@ -178,12 +181,13 @@ utilizați o rezoluție mai mică tastînd <code>vgalo</code> la prompter.</para
         </listitem>
 
         <listitem>
-          <para>Dacă mașina este foarte veche, instalarea în mod grafic poate să nu fie
-posibilă. În acest caz merită încercată o instalare în mod text. Pentru
-aceasta apăsați ESC în primul ecran de întîmpinare și confirmați cu
-ENTER. Vi-se va prezenta un ecran negru pe care este afișat cuvîntul
-„boot:”. Tastați „text” și apăsați ENTER. Acum puteți continua cu instalarea
-în mod text.</para>
+          <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
+possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use
+this press <emphasis role="bold">Esc</emphasis> at the first welcome screen
+and confirm with <emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis>. You will be
+presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and press
+<emphasis role="bold">ENTER</emphasis> to continue with the installation in
+text mode.</para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
@@ -202,22 +206,20 @@ opțiuni.</para>
     <section>
       <title>Problemă de memorie</title>
 
-      <para>De acest lucru poate fi nevoie foarte rar, însă în unele cazuri cantitatea
-de memorie RAM disponibilă poate fi raportată incorect. Pentru a o specifica
-manual, utilizați parametrul <code>mem=xxxM</code>, une xxx este cantitatea
-corectă de RAM. Ex: <code>mem=256M</code> va specifica 256Mo de RAM.</para>
+      <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
     </section>
 
     <section>
       <title>Partiții dinamice</title>
 
-      <para>Dacă doriți să convertiți discul dur din formatul de „bază” în formatul
-„dinamic” din Microsoft Windows, trebuie să știți că nu veți mai putea
-instala Mageia pe acest disc. Pentru a reveni la formatul de bază,
-consultați documentația Microsoft: <link
+      <para>If you converted your hard disk from <emphasis role="bold">basic</emphasis>
+format to <emphasis role="bold">dynamic</emphasis> format in Microsoft
+Windows, then it is not possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert
+to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link
 ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
-
-  <section/>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/media_selection.xml
index e6ab8121..d7eaf983 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/media_selection.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/media_selection.xml
@@ -4,17 +4,21 @@
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
 
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
 <!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
 <!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
-format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="media_selection-im1"
+align="center" revision="1" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <para>Aici aveți lista depozitelor disponibile. Nu toate depozitele sînt
 disponibile, în funcție de mediile pe care le utilizați pentru
@@ -36,11 +40,11 @@ ATI, microcod pentru diverse plăci WiFi, etc.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para>Depozitul <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> include pachete publicate sub o
-licență liberă. Criteriul principal pentru plasarea pachetelor în acest
-depozit este faptul că acestea pot încălca anumite brevete în unele țări, de
-exemplu: codecurile multimedia necesare pentru redarea diverselor fișiere
-audio/video, pachete necesare pentru redarea DVD-urilor comerciale, etc.</para>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/minimal-install.xml
index d4633486..e3ce4a07 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/minimal-install.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/minimal-install.xml
@@ -1,13 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="minimal-install"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-	 xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to
  start a new page-->
 <!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
@@ -16,21 +7,27 @@
   </info>
 
   
+
   
 
-  <para>Puteți alege o instalare minimalistă deselectînd tot din ecranul cu selecția
-grupurilor de pachete, vedeți <xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
-  <para>Dacă doriți, puteți bifa în plus opțiunea „Selectare individuală a
-pachetelor” din același ecran.</para>
-  <para>Instalarea minimalistă este destinată pentru cei cu utilizări specifice de
-<application>Mageia</application>, precum un server sau o stație de lucru
-specializată. În mod probabil veți utiliza această opțiune în combinație cu
-opțiunea „Selectare individuală a pachetelor” menționată mai sus, pentru o
-configurare fină a instalării, vedeți <xref
-linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
-  <para>Dacă alegeți această clasă de instalare, ecranul următor vă va oferi cîteva
-opțiuni de instalare suplimentare și foarte utile, precum documentația și X.</para>
-  <para>Dacă este selectat „Cu X” se va include și IceWM ca mediu de birou lejer.</para>
+  <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the
+Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para>
+
+  <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis role="bold">Individual
+package selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para>
+
+  <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
+<application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
+workstation. You will probably use this option combined with the <emphasis
+role="bold">Individual package selection</emphasis> option mentioned above,
+to fine-tune your installation, see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para>
+
+  <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen will offer
+you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para>
+
+  <para>If <emphasis role="bold">With X</emphasis> is chosen, then IceWM (a
+lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para>
+
   <para>Documentația de bază este furnizată sub forma de pagini de manual sau de
 informații. Aceasta conține paginile de manual din <link
 xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation
@@ -39,9 +36,7 @@ xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU
 coreutils</link>.</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
-  </section>
-
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/misc-params.xml
index 66d7d4e5..e19cc596 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/misc-params.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/misc-params.xml
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@
 <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC-->
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX a făcut alegeri inteligente pentru configurația sistemului în funcție
-de opțiunile pe care le-ați ales și de componentele materiale
-detectate. Puteți verifica parametrii aici, iar dacă doriți îi puteți
-schimba apăsînd <guibutton>Configurează</guibutton>.</para>
+  <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want by pressing
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para>
 
   <note>
-    <para>As a general rule, default settings are recommended and you can keep them
-with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
+    <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings
+unless:<itemizedlist>
         <listitem>
           <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para>
         </listitem>
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
         </listitem>
 
         <listitem>
-          <para>something else is said in the detailed sections below</para>
+          <para>some other factor mentionned in the detailed sections below is an issue.</para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist></para>
   </note>
@@ -40,16 +40,15 @@ with 3 exceptions:<itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Fus orar</guilabel></para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DracX a selecționat un fus orar în funcție de limba pe care ați ales-o. Îl
-puteți schimba dacă este nevoie. Vedeți și <xref
-linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. You
+can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
         <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><guilabel>Țară / Regiune</guilabel></para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">Este foarte important să corectați acest parametru dacă nu vă aflați în țara
-selecționată. Vedeți <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the
+setting.  See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
@@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ selecționată. Vedeți <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX a făcut o alegeri bune pentru parametrii încărcătorului de sistem.</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub2</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c" revision="2">Pentru mai multe informații, consultați <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para>
       </listitem>
@@ -72,9 +71,8 @@ director <literal>/home</literal>.</para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><guilabel>Servicii</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">Serviciile sistem se referă la acele programe mici care se execută în fundal
-(demoni). Această unealtă vă permite să activați sau să dezactivați anumite
-sarcini.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background
+(daemons).  This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para>
 
         <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">Trebuie să verificați cu atenție înainte de a schimba ceva aici - o greșeală
 poate împiedica funcționarea corectă a calculatorului.</para>
@@ -93,8 +91,8 @@ poate împiedica funcționarea corectă a calculatorului.</para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Tastatură</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Aici puteți configura sau schimba dispunerea tastaturii, care va depinde de
-locația voastră, de limbă și de tipul tastaturii.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type
+of keyboard.</para>
 
         <note>
           <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind
@@ -112,9 +110,9 @@ tablete, trackball-uri, etc.</para>
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Placă de sunet</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">Instalatorul utilizează pilotul implicit, dacă există. Opțiunea pentru a
-selecționa un alt pilot este propusă numai cînd există mai mulți piloți
-pentru acestă placă, însă nici unul dintre ei nu este cel implicit.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer uses the default driver - if there is a default one. The
+option to select a different driver is only given when there is more than
+one driver for your card, but where none of them is the default one.</para>
       </listitem>
 
       <listitem>
@@ -141,14 +139,14 @@ align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></me
       <listitem>
         <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Rețea</guilabel>:</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">Aici puteți configura rețeaua, însă pentru plăcile de rețea cu piloți non
-liberi este mai bine să faceți asta după redemarare, din
-<application>Centrul de Control Mageia</application>, dacă nu ați activat
-încă depozitele mediilor Nonfree.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the <application>Mageia
+Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media
+repositories.</para>
 
         <warning>
-          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">Cînd adăugați o placă de rețea, nu uitați să configurați parafocul ca să
-supravegheze și acea interfață.</para>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor
+that interface as well.</para>
         </warning>
       </listitem>
 
@@ -159,8 +157,8 @@ supravegheze și acea interfață.</para>
 Internet. Această secțiune vă permite să configurați calculatorul ca să
 utilizeze un serviciu de proxy.</para>
 
-        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">S-ar putea să aveți nevoie să consultați administratorul sistemului pentru a
-obține parametrii pe care trebuie să-i introduceți aici.</para>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you
+need to enter here.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
   </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/securityLevel.xml
index 6357e3a2..77abc011 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/securityLevel.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/securityLevel.xml
@@ -1,33 +1,40 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="securityLevel">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Nivel de securitate</title>
+  </info>
 
+  
 
-    <info>
-      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Nivel de securitate</title>
-    </info>
+  
 
- 
- 
-
-<mediaobject>
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
-align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"
+align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended
+setting for the average user. The <emphasis role="bold">Secure</emphasis>
+setting will create a highly protected system - for instance if the system
+is to be used as a public server.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">Aici puteți regla nivelul de securitate.</para>
+  <para xml:id="securityLevel-pa2" revision="1">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will
+send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations
+which require notification to a system administrator.</para>
 
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Lăsați parametrii impliciți așa cum sînt dacă nu știți ce să alegeți.</para>
+  <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter &lt;user>@localhost -
+where &lt;user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para>
 
-    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">După instalare, va fi tot timpul posibil să ajustați parametrii de
-securitate în secțiunea <guilabel>Securitate</guilabel> din Centrul de
-Control Mageia.</para>
-  </section>
+  <note>
+    <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool
+messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore
+be configured for receiving such mail!</para>
+  </note>
 
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
+in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectCountry.xml
index df94ec6a..d710b630 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectCountry.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectCountry.xml
@@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ align="center" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></me
 like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
 can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">Dacă țara dorită nu este în listă, faceți clic pe butonul <guilabel>Alte
-țări</guilabel> și alegeți de acolo țara / regiunea.</para>
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other
+Countries</guilabel> option and choose your country / region there.</para>
 
   <note>
-    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">Dacă țara dorită se află doar în lista <guilabel>Alte țări</guilabel>, după
-ce faceți clic pe <guibutton>OK</guibutton> poate apărea că o țară din prima
-listă a fost aleasă. Ignorați acest lucru, DrakX va continua cu alegerea pe
-care ați făcut-o.</para>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list,
+after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem that a country from the
+first list was chosen. Please ignore this, as DrakX will apply your actual
+choice.</para>
   </note>
 
   <section xml:id="inputMethod">
@@ -33,14 +33,15 @@ care ați făcut-o.</para>
 input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
 multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
 default input method, so users should not need to configure it
-manually. Other input methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar
+manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar
 functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package
 selection.</para>
 
     <note>
       <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
-after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" ->
-"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para>
+after you boot your installed system via <emphasis role="bold">Configure
+your Computer</emphasis> -> <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis>, or by
+running localedrake as root.</para>
     </note>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectInstallClass.xml
index 297bc071..7c4fc2b4 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectInstallClass.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -1,12 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
   
 
   
@@ -14,6 +6,7 @@
   
 
   
+
   
 
   <info>
@@ -27,49 +20,50 @@
   </info>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
-format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
       <para>Instalare</para>
 
-      <para>Utilizați această opțiune pentru o instalare nouă de
-<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+      <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of
+<application>Mageia</application>. This will format the root partition (/),
+but can preserve a separated /home partition.</para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
       <para>Actualizare</para>
 
-      <para>Aveți mai multe distribuții <application>Mageia</application> instalate pe
-calculator, instalatorul vă va permite să actualizați una din ele la ultima
-versiune.</para>
+      <para>This can be used to upgrade an existing installation of
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
 
-<warning>
-	<para>Numai actualizarea de la o versiune precedentă de Mageia care era
-<emphasis>încă suportată</emphasis> cînd a fost realizat acest instalator, a
-fost testată îndeajuns. Dacă doriți să actualizați o versiune de Mageia care
-și-a încheiat ciclul de viață cînd a fost lansată această ediție, este mai
-bine să faceți o instalare nouă păstrînd partiția <literal>/home</literal>.</para>
-</warning>
+      <warning>
+        <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still
+supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been
+thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached
+its End Of Life, then it is better to do a clean install instead while
+preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para>
+      </warning>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
 
   <note>
-    <para>Dacă vă decideți să opriți instalarea în curs, puteți reporni, dar vă rugăm
-să vă gîndiți de două ori înainte de a face acest lucru. Odată ce o partiție
-a fost formatată sau actualizările au început să fie instalate, calculatorul
-nu mai este în aceeași stare și repornirea v-ar putea lăsa cu un sistem
-inutilizabil. Dacă în ciuda acestui fapt sînteți foarte sigur că doriți să
-reporniți, deschideți un terminal apăsînd tastele <guibutton>Alt Ctrl
-F2</guibutton> în același timp, apoi apăsați <guibutton>Alt Ctrl
-Delete</guibutton> simultan pentru a reporni.</para>
+    <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to
+reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been
+formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in
+the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an
+unusable system. If in spite of that, and only if you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing <guilabel>Alt
+Ctrl F2</guilabel> simultaneously. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
   </note>
 
   <tip>
-    <para>Dacă ați descoperit că ați uitat să selectați o limbă adițională, vă puteți
-întoarce din ecranul „Instalare sau actualizare” la ecranul de alegere a
-limbii apăsînd <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. <emphasis>Nu</emphasis>
-faceți acest lucru mai tîrziu în cursul instalării.</para>
+    <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the <emphasis role="bold">Install or Upgrade</emphasis>
+screen to the language choice screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Home</guilabel> simultaneously. <emphasis role="bold">Do not</emphasis> do
+this later in the install.</para>
   </tip>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectKeyboard.xml
index 170d8b5c..daaf95a6 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectKeyboard.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -1,11 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
-         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
-         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
-         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
-         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
-         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
-         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectKeyboard" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   
 
   
@@ -16,17 +9,17 @@
 <title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Tastatură</title>
   </info>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selecționează tastatura potrivită pentru limba aleasă. Dacă nu s-a
+  <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="1">DrakX selecționează tastatura potrivită pentru limba aleasă. Dacă nu s-a
 găsit tastatura potrivită, se va reveni implicit la dispunerea de tastatură
 US.</para>
 
   <mediaobject>
-<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" />
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" align="center"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Verificați că selecția este corectă sau alegeți altă dispunere de
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2" revision="1">Verificați că selecția este corectă sau alegeți altă dispunere de
 tastatură. Dacă nu știți ce dispunere are tastatura, uitați-vă pe
 specificațiile sistemului, sau întrebați furnizorul de la care l-ați
 cumpărat. Poate că există o etichetă pe tastatură care indică dispunerea. Vă
@@ -35,23 +28,23 @@ xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">Dacă tastatura dorită nu se află în lista afișată, faceți clic pe
-<guibutton>Mai multe</guibutton> pentru a obține o listă completă și
-selectați-o de acolo.</para>
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3" revision="1">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on
+<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard
+there.</para>
 
       <para revision="1"><warning>
-          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">După ce ați ales o tastatură din căsuța de dialog <guibutton>Mai
-multe</guibutton>, vă veți întoarce la prima fereastră de dialog pentru
-alegerea tastaturii și va apărea că a fost aleasă tastatura din acel
-ecran. Puteți ignora liniștiți această anomalie și continua cu instalarea:
-tastatura selecționată este cea pe care ați ales-o din lista completă.</para>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog,
+you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though
+a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this and
+continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will be
+applied.</para>
         </warning></para>
     </listitem>
 
     <listitem>
-      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">Dacă alegeți o tastatură cu caractere non-latine, veți vedea un ecran de
-dialog suplimentar în care veți fi întrebat cum preferați să comutați între
-dispunerea latină și non-latină.</para>
+      <para xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the
+Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
     </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
-</section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectLanguage.xml
index 0e7ae72c..17d6d6d4 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectLanguage.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -1,9 +1,14 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="selectLanguage">
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
+
   <info>
     <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
@@ -14,37 +19,45 @@
        up mess made of this header by xxe -->
 <title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Alegeți limba ce va fi utilizată</title>
   </info>
+
   <para condition="classical">Selectați limba preferată, desfășurînd mai întîi lista
 continentului. <application>Mageia</application> va utiliza această alegere
 pe parcursul instalării și după pentru pentru sistemul instalat.</para>
+
   <para condition="live">Select your preferred language.  <application>Mageia</application> will use
 this selection during the installation and for your installed system.</para>
-  <para condition="classical">În cazul în care veți avea nevoie de mai multe limbi instalate în sistem,
-pentru uzul personal sau al celorlalți utilizatori, atunci trebuie să
-utilizați butonul <guibutton>Multilingv</guibutton> de mai jos și să le
-adăugați acum. Va fi mai dificil să adăugați suport multilingv după
-instalare.</para>
+
+  <para condition="classical">If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be
+installed on your system, then you should use the <guibutton>Multiple
+languages</guibutton> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add
+extra language support after installation.</para>
+
   <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
 fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-language.png"
 format=""/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
   <warning condition="classical">
-    <para>Chiar dacă ați optat pentru mai multe limbi, va trebui să alegeți una din
-ele ca limbă preferată din primul ecran cu lista limbilor. Va fi de asemenea
-indicată drept limba preferată în ecranul multilingv.</para>
+    <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your
+preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be marked as
+chosen in the multiple languages screen.</para>
   </warning>
+
   <itemizedlist>
     <listitem condition="classical">
       <para>Dacă dispunerea tastaturii nu este aceeași cu limba preferată, atunci este
 recomandat să instalați și limba pentru dispunerea tastaturii.</para>
     </listitem>
+
     <listitem>
       <para>Mageia utilizează UTF-8 (Unicode) implicit.</para>
-      <para condition="classical">Acest lucru poate fi dezactivat în ecranul „multilingv” dacă știți că nu
-corespunde limbii dumneavoastră. Dezactivarea suportului UTF-8 se aplică
-tuturor limbilor instalate.</para>
+
+      <para condition="classical">This may be disabled in the <emphasis role="bold">Multiple
+languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your
+language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages.</para>
     </listitem>
+
     <listitem>
       <para>Puteți schimba limba sistemului și după instalare din Centrul de Control
 Mageia -> Sistem -> Gestionați localizarea sistemului.</para>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloader.xml
index d2fd0ddd..a038f359 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloader.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="setupBootloader">
   
-
   
-
   <info>
     <!---->
 <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page
@@ -10,217 +8,137 @@
 Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6.  20170209 updated SC-->
 <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Opțiunile principale ale încărcătorului de sistem</title>
   </info>
-
   <section>
     <title>Bootloader interface</title>
-
     <para>By default, Mageia uses exclusively:</para>
-
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system</para>
+        <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system</para>
       </listitem>
-
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2-efi for a UEFI system.</para>
+        <para>GRUB2-efi for a UEFI system.</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
-
     <tip>
       <para>The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)</para>
     </tip>
-
     <section>
-      <title>Grub2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems</title>
-
+      <title>GRUB2 on Legacy/MBR and Legacy/GPT systems</title>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"
 fileref="live-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
-      <para>Nu modificați „Dispozitivul de demaraj” doar dacă știți ce faceți.</para>
+      <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you
+really know what you are doing.</para>
     </section>
-
     <section>
-      <title>Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</title>
-
-      <para>With an UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot
-choose between with or without graphical menu</para>
-
+      <title>GRUB2-efi on UEFI systems</title>
+      <para>With a UEFI system, the user interface is slightly different as you cannot
+choose between the <emphasis role="bold">with</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">without graphical menu</emphasis> options.</para>
       <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader2.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-setupBootloader2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
       <para>If Mageia is the only system installed on your computer, the installer
-created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to receive the bootloader
-(Grub2-efi). If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your
+created an ESP (EFI System Partition) to house the bootloader
+(GRUB2-efi). If there are already UEFI operating systems installed on your
 computer (Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer detects the existing
-ESP created by Windows and adds grub2-efi. Although it is possible to have
-several ESPs, only one is advised and enough whatever the number of
+ESP created by Windows and adds GRUB2-efi. Although it is possible to have
+several ESPs, only one is required (and advised), whatever the number of
 operating systems you have.</para>
-
-      <para>Nu modificați „Dispozitivul de demaraj” doar dacă știți ce faceți.</para>
+      <para>Don't modify the <emphasis role="bold">Boot Device</emphasis> unless you
+really know what you are doing.</para>
     </section>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title xml:id="setupMageiaBootloader">Se utilizează un încărcător de sistem Mageia</title>
-
-    <para>By default, according to your system, Mageia writes a new:</para>
-
+    <para>By default, and according to your system, Mageia writes one of the
+following:</para>
     <itemizedlist>
       <listitem>
-        <para>GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first hard
-drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para>
+        <para>a GRUB2 bootloader either into the MBR (Master Boot Record) of your first
+hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para>
       </listitem>
-
       <listitem>
-        <para>Grub2-efi bootloader into the ESP</para>
+        <para>a GRUB2-efi bootloader into the ESP</para>
       </listitem>
     </itemizedlist>
-
     <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to
 add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour,
-click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then uncheck the box
-<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para>
-
+click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> and then untick the <emphasis
+role="bold">Probe Foreign OS</emphasis> option.</para>
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center"
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject
 condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png"
 align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title>Se utilizează încărcătorul de sistem existent</title>
-
-    <para>Procedura exactă pentru adăugarea sistemului Mageia la un încărcător de
-sistem existent depășește scopul acestui ajutor. Totuși, în majoritatea
-cazurilor, acest lucru implică lansarea programului de instalare al acelui
-încărcător de sistem, care ar trebui să detecteze și să adauge automat noul
-sistem Mageia. Consultați documentația sistemului de operare în chestiune.</para>
+    <para>The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader
+is beyond the scope of this documentation, however in most cases it will
+involve running the relevant bootloader installation program which should
+detect and add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating
+system in question.</para>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title xml:id="setupChainLoading">Using chain loading</title>
-
-    <para>If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS,
+    <para>If you don't want a bootable Mageia, but to chain-load it from another OS,
 click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton>, then on
-<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and Check the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and tick the box <guilabel>Do not touch ESP
 or MBR</guilabel>.</para>
-
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata
 fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
 <imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata
 fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
-
     <para>You will get a warning that the bootloader is missing, ignore it by clicking
 <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
-
     <mediaobject>
 <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png"/>
 </imageobject></mediaobject>
   </section>
-
   <section>
     <title>Options</title>
-
     <section>
       <title>First page</title>
-
-      <para><itemizedlist>
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This text box
-lets you set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is
-started up.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the
-bootloader. This means a username and password will be asked at the boot
-time to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is "root"
-and the password is the one chosen here after.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: This text box is where you actually put the
-password</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and Drakx will
-check that it matches with the one set above.</para>
-          </listitem>
-
-          <listitem>
-            <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel></para>
-
-            <itemizedlist>
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power
-Interface) is a standard for the power management. It can save energy by
-stopping unused devices, this was the method used before APM. Unchecking it
-could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if
-you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance
-random reboots or system lockups).</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables / disables symmetric
-multiprocessing for multi core processors.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: Enabling or disabling this gives the
-operating system access to the Advanced Programmable Interrupt
-Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and Advanced
-IRQ (Interrupt Request)  management.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Here you can set local APIC, which
-manages all external interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system.</para>
-              </listitem>
-            </itemizedlist>
-          </listitem>
-        </itemizedlist></para>
+      <para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Delay before booting the default image</guilabel>: This lets you
+set a delay in seconds before the default operating system is started up.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Security</guilabel>: This allows you to set a password for the
+bootloader. This means a username and password will be required when booting
+to select a booting entry or change settings. The username is <emphasis
+role="bold">root</emphasis> and the password is the one chosen here-after.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: Choose a password for the bootloader.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the password and DrakX will
+check that it matches with the one above.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel></para><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable ACPI:</guilabel> ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power
+Interface) is a standard for power management. It can save energy by
+stopping unused devices.  Deselecting it could be useful if, for example,
+your computer does not support ACPI or if you think the ACPI implementation
+might cause some problems (for instance random reboots or system lockups).</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable SMP</guilabel>: This option enables/disables symmetric
+multiprocessing for multi core processors.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable APIC</guilabel>: This gives the operating system access to
+the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more
+complex priority models, and Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management.</para></listitem><listitem><para><guilabel>Enable Local APIC</guilabel>: Local APIC manages all external
+interrupts for a specific processor in an SMP system.</para></listitem></itemizedlist></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
     </section>
-
     <section>
       <title>Next page</title>
-
       <itemizedlist>
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Default:</guilabel> Operating system started up by default</para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Append:</guilabel> This option lets you pass the kernel
 information or tell the kernel to give you more information as it boots.</para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
           <para><guilabel>Probe foreign OS</guilabel>: see above <link
 linkend="setupMageiaBootloader">Using a Mageia bootloader</link></para>
         </listitem>
-
         <listitem>
-          <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel><itemizedlist>
-              <listitem>
-                <para><guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth
-the boot menu will use. If you click the down triangle you will be offered
-other size and colour depth options.</para>
-              </listitem>
-
-              <listitem>
-                <para><emphasis role="bold">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link
-linkend="setupChainLoading">Using the chain loading</link></para>
-              </listitem>
-            </itemizedlist></para>
+          <para><guilabel>Advanced</guilabel><itemizedlist><listitem><para><guilabel>Video mode:</guilabel> This sets the screen size and colour depth
+to be used by the boot menu. If you click the down triangle you will be
+offered other size and colour depth options.</para></listitem><listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>: see above <link
+linkend="setupChainLoading">Using the chain loading</link></para></listitem></itemizedlist></para>
         </listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
     </section>
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
index 9e648ad3..d7d18bf9 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -1,15 +1,19 @@
-<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry">
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry">
   
+
   <info>
     <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page
 
 Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6-->
 <title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Adăugați sau modificați o intrare din meniul de demaraj</title>
   </info>
-  <para>To do that you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the
-software grub-customizer instead (Available in the Mageia repositories).</para>
+
+  <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the
+software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead
+(available in the Mageia repositories).</para>
+
   <note>
-    <para>For more information, see our wiki: <link
+    <para>For more information, see: <link
 ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para>
   </note>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupSCSI.xml
index 371a60ab..e2abafca 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupSCSI.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -1,27 +1,23 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
-<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
- xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
- xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
- xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
- xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
- xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Configurare SCSI</title>
   </info>
 
   
+
   
+
   
+
   
-   
-  
-  
+
   
+
   
+
   
-   <mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
 <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
 <!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
 <!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
@@ -30,16 +26,15 @@
 <!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
 <!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
-<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
-format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata>
-</imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">În general DrakX detectează corect discurile. La unele controlere SCSI mai
-vechi poate să nu determine corect piloții care trebuiesc utilizați și prin
-urmare eșuează la recunoașterea discurilor.</para>
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older
+SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use
+and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para>
 
-  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">Dacă se întîmplă acest lucru, va trebui să-i indicați manual lui DrakX ce
-discuri SCSI aveți.</para>
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell DrakX which SCSI drive(s)
+you have.</para>
 
-  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX va putea atunci să le configureze corect.</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3" revision="3">DrakX va putea atunci să le configureze corect.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/soundConfig.xml
index ce65fed6..d4430de6 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/soundConfig.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/soundConfig.xml
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@
 <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png"
 xml:id="soundConfig-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para>Acest ecran afișează numele pilotului pe care instalatorul l-a ales pentru
-placa de sunet, care va fi cel implicit dacă există unul.</para>
+  <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your
+sound card is given, which will be the default driver if one exists.</para>
 
   <para>Pilotul implicit ar trebui să funcționeze fără probleme. Totuși, dacă
 întîlniți probleme după instalare, atunci executați
@@ -20,20 +20,22 @@ Control Center), alegînd categoria <guilabel>Componente materiale</guilabel>
 și faceți clic pe <guilabel>Configurare sunet</guilabel> în partea din
 dreapta sus a ecranului.</para>
 
-  <para>Apoi, în draksound sau ecranul uneltei de „Configurarea sunetului”, apăsați
-pe <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> și apoi pe <guibutton>Depanare</guibutton>
-pentru a găsi sfaturi utile despre cum să rezolvați problema.</para>
+  <para>Then, in the <emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">Sound Configuration</emphasis> tool screen, click on
+<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find useful advice about how to
+solve the problem.</para>
 
   <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced">
     <info>
       <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">Avansat</title>
     </info>
 
-    <para>Apăsarea pe <guibutton>Avansat</guibutton> în acest ecran, în cursul
-instalării, este utilă dacă nu există un pilot implicit dar sînt cîțiva
-disponibili și credeți că instalatorul l-a selecționat pe cel greșit. </para>
+    <para>Clicking <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Advanced</guibutton></emphasis> in
+this screen, during install, is useful if there is no default driver and
+there are several drivers available, but you think the installer selected
+the wrong one.</para>
 
-    <para>În acel caz puteți selecta un pilot diferit după ce faceți clic pe
-<guibutton>Alegerea unui pilot</guibutton>.</para>
+    <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on <emphasis
+role="bold"><guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton></emphasis>.</para>
   </section>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
index 6827f6d5..35264c30 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
-
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm" version="5.0" xml:lang="ro">
   <info>
     <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirmați formatarea discului dur</title>
   </info>
@@ -7,7 +6,7 @@
   
 
   
-  
+
   
 
   
@@ -19,16 +18,15 @@
     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
     saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
 <!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
-<imageobject condition='live'> <imagedata
-fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-></imagedata> </imageobject> <imageobject condition='classical'> <imagedata
-fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG" align="center"
-></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject>
+<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Faceți clic pe <guibutton>Înapoi</guibutton> dacă nu sînteți sigur de
-alegere.</para>
+  <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are at all unsure about your
+choice.</para>
 
-  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Apăsați pe <guibutton>Înainte</guibutton> dacă sigur doriți să ștergeți
-toate partițiile, toate sistemele de operare și toate datele de pe acel
-disc.</para>
-</section>
+  <para xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2" revision="1">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to proceed if you are sure that it is
+ok to erase every partition, every operating system and all data that might
+be on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/uninstall-Mageia.xml
index 815f0ef2..56c22cd4 100644
--- a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/uninstall-Mageia.xml
+++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ro/uninstall-Mageia.xml
@@ -7,35 +7,29 @@ Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.-->
 
   
 
-  <section>
-    <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti2">Îndrumar</title>
+  <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short
+you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the
+possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para>
 
-    <para>Dacă Mageia nu v-a convins sau nu ați putut să o instalați corect, pe scurt
-doriți să vă debarasați de ea. Aveți tot dreptul, iar Mageia vă oferă
-posibilitatea de a o dezinstala. Acest lucru nu este valabil pentru toate
-sistemele de operare.</para>
+  <para>After your data backup, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select
+<emphasis role="bold">Rescue system</emphasis>, then, <emphasis
+role="bold">Restore Windows boot loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you
+will only have Windows, with no option to choose your operating system.</para>
 
-    <para>După ce v-ați salvat datele, redemarați de pe DVD-ul Mageia și selectați
-„Recuperare sistem”, iar apoi „Restaurare încărcător de sistem Windows”. La
-următoarea redemarare veți avea numai Windows fără niciun alt meniu ca să vă
-alegeți sistemul de operare.</para>
+  <para>In Windows to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on
+<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management
+-> Storage -> Disk Management</code>. You will recognize a Mageia partition
+because they are labeled <guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their
+size and place on the disk. Right click on each of these partitions and
+select <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to free up the space.</para>
 
-    <para>Pentru a recupera în Windows spațiul ocupat de partițiile Mageia, faceți
-clic pe <code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer
-Management -> Storage -> Disk Management</code> pentru a accesa gestionarea
-partițiilor. Veți recunoaște partițiile Mageia după eticheta
-<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, dar și după mărimea și amplasamentul lor pe
-disc. Faceți clic pe una din aceste partiții și selectați
-<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>. Spațiul va fi eliberat.</para>
-
-    <para>Dacă utilizați Windows XP, puteți crea o partiție nouă și s-o formatați
+  <para>Dacă utilizați Windows XP, puteți crea o partiție nouă și s-o formatați
 (FAT32 sau NTFS). Aceasta va primi o literă de partiție.</para>
 
-    <para>Dacă aveți Vista sau 7, mai aveți o posibilitate în plus, puteți extinde
-partiția existentă care se află în partea stîngă a spațiului liber. Mai sînt
-și alte unelte de partiționare care pot fi utilizate, precum gparted,
-disponibil pentru Windows și Linux. Ca de obicei, fiți foarte atenți cînd
-modificați partițiile și asigurați-vă că ați făcut o copie de siguranță
-pentru lucrurile importante.</para>
-  </section>
+  <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the
+existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other
+partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis
+role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As
+always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything
+important to you.</para>
 </section>
\ No newline at end of file